JP2021010406A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes variable display executing means, performance control means, and information output means. The variable display executing means can execute variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information in parallel, when a predetermined condition corresponding to one variable display is satisfied, interrupts the other variable display, and restarts the other variable display after the interruption. The information output means can output special information capable of specifying the remaining variable display time of the other variable display to the performance control means. The performance control means can execute a performance corresponding to the variable display time specified on the basis of the special information.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 10-18

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, when a game ball launched into a game area wins a prize in a predetermined winning opening, the identification information is variably displayed, and when the display result of the variable display becomes a predetermined display result, a game corresponding to the display result is generated. Pachinko game machines that let you play are known. The predetermined display result is, for example, a display result indicating a big hit or a display result indicating a small hit.

In addition, some pachinko gaming machines control to a special state in which the small hit gaming state is more frequently controlled than in the normal state. In such a pachinko gaming machine, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed at the same time. For example, there is known a gaming machine that interrupts the variable display of the first special symbol when a display result indicating a small hit is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2018-033787

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, when a predetermined condition is satisfied with one of the identification information, when the variable display of the other identification information is interrupted, it is possible to perform an effect according to the interruption. However, the interest was insufficient.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

(Means 1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of playing a game).
Variable display execution means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 and an effect control CPU 120) that variablely displays identification information (for example, a special symbol or a decorative symbol) and derives and displays a display result.
An effect control means capable of controlling an effect (for example, an effect control CPU 120) and
An information output means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) for outputting information to the effect control means is provided.
The variable display execution means
The variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel.
When a predetermined condition corresponding to one variable display (for example, the second special symbol) is satisfied (for example, the big hit symbol is stopped or the small hit symbol is stopped), the other variable display (for example, the first special symbol) is performed. (As shown in FIGS. 10-12 and 10-13, the update of the timer of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game or the big hit game based on the variable display of the second special symbol. After the interruption, the other variable display is restarted.
The information output means can output special information (residual fluctuation time designation command) capable of specifying the remaining variable display time of the other variable display to the effect control means (as shown in 013SHS1309A of FIG. 10-13). , Send the residual fluctuation time specification command A.),
The effect control means displays the background image 013SH150B in the remaining time suggestion mode as shown in the effect corresponding to the variable display time specified based on the special information (for example, FIGS. 10-20 (G) and 10-20 (H)). The effect that the area decreases with the passage of time) is feasible,
A game machine characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, since the remaining variable display time of the variable display of the other identification information can be grasped, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the remaining variable display time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Means 2)
In the gaming machine according to means 1.
The information output means can output the special information at a timing when the remaining variable display time of the other variable display reaches a predetermined time (for example, as shown in 013SHS1313A of FIG. 10-13, the remaining 1 second. The remaining fluctuation time specification command B1 is transmitted at the timing.)

According to such a configuration, when the variable display of the other identification information reaches a predetermined time, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the timing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Means 3)
In the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2.
The information output means can output the special information every time the variable display time of the other variable display elapses (as shown in 013SHS1309A of FIG. 10-13, the residual variation is made at 10-second intervals. The time specification command A is sent.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the timing of the variable display of the other identification information at each timing when the special time elapses. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Means 4) In the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
The effect control means is a notification effect that suggests the remaining variable display time based on the special information (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-20 (G) and 10-20 (H), the background image 013SH150B in the remaining time suggestion mode. The display area of is reduced with the passage of time).

With such a configuration, the remaining variable display time can be suggested. As a result, the player can play the game according to the remaining variable display time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Means 5) In the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
A game state control means that can control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) and a special state (for example, a KT state) in which a game value is easily given by the special state based on the variable display of the second identification information. (For example, a game control microcomputer 100) is further provided.
The effect control means
In the special state, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information by any one of a plurality of effect modes (for example, small hit RUSH mode A or remaining time suggestion mode).
It is possible to display the first corresponding display corresponding to the given game value (for example, the total prize ball number display 013SH120 in FIG. 10-19 (C)) and the second corresponding display corresponding to the number of executions of the special state. Yes,
The first correspondence display and the second correspondence display are displayed in a common display mode regardless of the effect mode (for example, the total prize ball number display 013SH120 in FIG. 10-19 (C) and FIG. It is a display mode common to the total prize ball number display 013SH120 of 10-19 (F)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the first corresponding display and the second corresponding display from changing depending on the effect mode. Therefore, the player can easily grasp the first correspondence display and the second correspondence display in each effect mode.

(Means 6) In the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
A plurality of types of advantageous states having different advantages for the player (for example, a big hit game state), a special state different from the plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, a small hit game state), and a variable display of the second identification information. A special state (for example, a KT state) in which a game value is easily given by the special state based on the above, and a game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled are further provided.
The plurality of types of advantageous states include a first advantageous state (for example, 10R probability variation jackpot B) and a second advantageous state (for example, 10R normal jackpot) whose advantage is lower than that of the first advantageous state. ,
As the variable display of the first identification information in the special state, the effect control means has a predetermined variable display corresponding to the control of the second advantageous state (for example, the first variation pattern # 60 in FIG. 10-7 (C)). However, when a variation pattern different from this is executed, a predetermined effect mode (for example, small hit RUSH mode A in FIG. 10-21 (C), FIG. 10-22 (C)) is executed. ) By the small hit RUSH mode B), it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 10-21 (C) and 10-22 (C)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform an effect in an effect mode according to a predetermined variable display. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(Means 7) In the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6.
The information output means
The special information can be output (for example, when the special variable display (for example, the variable display of the first variation pattern # 60 of FIG. 10-7 (C)) is executed as the variable display of the first identification information (for example). , As shown in FIGS. 10-12 and 10-13, in the variable display of the first special symbol, the timing of each 10 seconds in the special variable display (6 minutes) and the special variable display (6 minutes) The timing of the last 1 second in is specified, and the command is sent at the specified timing.),
When other variable display other than the special variable display is executed as the variable display of the identification information, the special information is not output (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-15, the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. Then, the timing of every 10 seconds in the special variable display (6 minutes) and the timing of the last 1 second in the special variable display (6 minutes) are not specified, and commands are used at these timings. Also does not send.).

According to such a configuration, in the special variable display of the first identification information, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the variable display time specified based on the special information. As a result, it is possible to perform an effective effect in the special variable display of the first identification information. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 1st special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol stop processing. It is the flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the character control normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the gate passage waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how of transition of a game state. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of the effect control main processing in a feature part 028IW. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the process of waiting for a variable display start. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end effect processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd KT middle prize ball number display processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the setting example of the display layer of the image which is displayed in an image display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display mode at the time of updating the prize ball number display. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display mode at the time of updating the prize ball number display. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display mode at the time of updating the prize ball number display. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the update timing at the time of updating the prize ball number display. It is a timing chart which shows other example of the update timing at the time of updating the prize ball number display. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display mode of 5000OVER display. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display mode in the case where the prize ball number display is displayed with low transmittance. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the display timing of "+10" display when a lagging ball is detected. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start waiting process in the modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process in the modification 1. FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display mode of the total prize ball number notification in modification 1. FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display mode of the small hit RUSH prize ball number display in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display mode of the small hit RUSH prize ball number display in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display mode of the 5000 OVER display in the modification 3. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display mode of the 5000 OVER display in the modification 3. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 which concerns on the feature part 013SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transition of the game state which concerns on a feature part 013SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline of the feature part 013SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the big hit probability, the small hit probability, and the loss probability of the 1st special symbol in the feature part 013SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the big hit probability, the small hit probability, and the loss probability of the 2nd special symbol in the feature part 013SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the jackpot type determination table in the feature part 013SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the variation pattern table for the 1st special symbol in the feature part 013SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the variation pattern table for the 2nd special symbol in the feature part 013SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect control command (residual variation time designation command). It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the 1st special symbol process process of a feature part 013SH. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the 1st special symbol process process of a feature part 013SH. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the 1st special symbol process process of the feature part 013SH. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the 1st special symbol process process of the feature part 013SH. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal process in the 2nd special symbol process process of the feature part 013SH. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation process in the 2nd special symbol process process of the feature part 013SH. It is a flowchart which shows the effect mode setting process in the effect control process process of the feature part 013SH. It is a flowchart which shows the residual time suggestion mode start process in the effect control process process of the feature part 013SH. It is a flowchart which shows the residual variation time designation command reception process in the effect control process process of the feature part 013SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transition of the effect screen when the big hit game of 10R probability variation big hit B is executed based on the variable display of the 1st special symbol in the KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transition of the effect screen when the big hit game of 10R probability variation big hit B is executed based on the variable display of the 1st special symbol in the KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transition of the effect screen when the big hit game other than 10R probability variation big hit A is executed based on the variable display of the 1st special symbol in the small hit RUSH mode A. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transition of the effect screen when the big hit game other than 10R probability variation big hit A is executed based on the variable display of the 1st special symbol in the small hit RUSH mode B.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). In addition, the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

Further, below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, a right-handed display 26 for prompting a right-handed operation of aiming at the right side of the game area and performing a firing operation is provided. There is. The right-handed display 26 is composed of, for example, LEDs, and is lit and controlled by a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is held is provided. In this example, the first hold display area 5A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure and the second hold display for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure. A region 5B is provided. A display area for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a right-handed notification LED 37 for prompting a right-handed operation is provided. The right-handed notification LED 37 is lit and controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 2).

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LED lights.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning opening is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening is guided to the back surface of the game board 2 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Further, a row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first start winning opening, so that the game ball flowing down from the right side of the game area does not enter the area provided with the first starting winning opening. Has been done. In this way, by providing the row of nails 19 for preventing the game ball flowing down from the right side of the game area from entering, the game ball is launched by aiming at the left side of the game area (so-called left-handed strike). The game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when the operation) is performed.

In this example, since the row of nails 19 is provided, the game ball can be won in the first start winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed. Not limited to. For example, since the first start winning opening is provided on the left side of the game area, the game ball may be configured to be able to win the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed, or the first starting winning opening may be won. A game ball may be configured to be able to win a prize in the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed by providing the mouth on the left side of the game area and also providing the row of nails 19.

A passing gate 41 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. The game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.

Below the passing gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 that forms a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and moves the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows in the front-rear direction to move the bottom surface. The large winning opening located below the member is changed into an open state (also referred to as an open state) in which the game ball can win a prize and a closed state (also referred to as a closed state) in which the game ball cannot win a prize. The special variable winning ball device 7 moves the bottom member forward in the jackpot game state that occurs when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the rear, and the opening control is executed so that the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened.

Below the special variable winning ball device 7, a special variable winning ball device 17 forming a special winning opening for small hits and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning opening are provided. FIG. As shown in, a special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and a variable winning ball device 6B is arranged adjacent to the right side thereof. The special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and have a plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of a flow path through which the game ball flows in the front-rear direction. By moving forward and backward, the game ball can be won in the special winning opening and the second starting winning opening located below the bottom member (also called the open state) and the game ball cannot be won in the closed state (closed state). Change to). The special variable winning ball device 17 has a bottom member in a small hit game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state of being moved forward toward the front, and the opening control is executed to open the special winning opening which is the winning area. Further, the variable winning ball device 6B moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the front when the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. The opening control for opening the second starting winning opening, which is the winning area, is executed.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed so as to have the same structure. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed so as to be slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right, the game ball dropped on the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed. If the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state, it moves on the special variable winning ball device 7 from the upper left to the lower right, and falls on the variable winning ball device 6B below it.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed in such a manner that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 17 are formed. The game ball on the winning ball device 6B moves from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B when the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B is closed. Go. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged adjacent to each other, the special variable winning ball device 7 is placed on the variable winning ball device 6B without winning a prize. If the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning opening is in the open state, the gaming ball wins the second starting winning opening and the special variable winning ball The game ball does not flow toward the device 17. On the other hand, if the second starting winning opening is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 17. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward and the special winning opening is in the open state, the game ball wins the special winning opening. Further, if the special winning opening is not open, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and falls toward the out opening as it is.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of regulatory pieces for reducing the flow speed of the game ball flowing down on the bottom surface member. There is. In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided with a restricting piece, so that the game flows down from the upper left to the lower right or from the upper right to the lower left. The flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the movement of the front-back component, and the time required for the flow is delayed as compared with the case without the regulation piece.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged on the right side. However, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 17 are arranged. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 6B is used as the special variable winning ball device. Since the game ball is configured to flow toward 17, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side. It can be said that it is.

A switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the large winning opening is provided in the large winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is open-controlled and the large winning opening is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed and controlled and the large winning opening is closed, the player cannot pass (enter) the game ball through the large winning opening to obtain the winning ball. It will be a disadvantage.

A switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the special winning opening is provided in the special winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, the number of winning balls is smaller than that when the game ball wins the large winning opening. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball passes (enters) through other winning holes such as the first starting winning opening 1 and the second starting winning opening. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is open-controlled and the special winning opening is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is closed and controlled and the special winning opening is closed, the player cannot obtain the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball through the special winning opening. It will be a disadvantage.

Further, in the second start winning opening, a second starting opening switch 22B capable of detecting a winning game ball in the second starting winning opening is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this pachinko gaming machine 1, a passing gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening), a variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening), and a special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) Is provided on the right side of the game area, so when a big hit game or a KT state (so-called small hit time) is in progress, the player aims at the right side of the game area and launches (so-called right-handed operation). )I do.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal pattern game.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, since the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41, the passing gate 41 plays a role as a normal starting area. However, even when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the passage gate 41 also plays a role as an operating region because the game shifts to the jackpot game state based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41. Therefore, the passing gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that plays the role of both a normal starting region and an operating region.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and further, frame LEDs 9 for game effects are provided around the game area. ..

A movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided at a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (so-called left-handed operation) aiming at the left side of the gaming area. When the player performs a left-handed operation by rotating the ball striking handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol is displayed. The first special figure game by the device 4A is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the first special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) as a confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "big hit". .. Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing". Even in the first special figure game, the small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed at an extremely low rate, and may be configured to be a "small hit".

After the display result in the first special figure game becomes "big hit", the game is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous to the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state is a combination of the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an open upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, prepare multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening, and gaming states (normal state, probability change state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.) after the big hit game state. , The jackpot type is set according to these. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a probability variation state, a KT state, or a high base state according to the jackpot type.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), the probability variation control is executed in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

In the KT state, KT control is executed, which is more likely to be a small hit than in the normal state. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, since a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small hit game state, the number of prize balls obtained is smaller than that in the big hit game state, but it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the high base state, the control (time reduction control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shorter than the normal state (time reduction state) is executed (time reduction state). Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is also executed by improving the probability of becoming the game ball from the normal state. The high base state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

The probabilistic state, KT state, and high base state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. To do. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called a number cut (number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous for the player, a probability variation state, a KT state, and a high base state, and the display result in the special figure game is "big hit". The pachinko game machine 1 controls the same as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (when a predetermined return process is not executed after the power is turned on, for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in a state of being reset.

When the jackpot game is completed and the game state is controlled to the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (right-handed operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. When the player performs a right-handed strike operation on the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the normal symbol (the normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In the second special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit". If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the second special figure game becomes "big hit", the game is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous to the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. After the display result in the second special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the small hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed).

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or a point of the frame LED9. Equal / extinguishing, operation of the movable body 32, etc. may be performed.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol which is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern is in the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", the fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and then the variable display is restarted to make one variable display look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state having the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 includes various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24). )) Detect signals (such as a detection signal indicating that the game ball has passed or entered and the switch is turned on) are taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a solenoid 81, a solenoid 82, a signal for turning on the solenoid 83, etc.) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or a prize-winning door. It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further controls the sound designation signal (the signal that specifies the sound to be output) in order to output the sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37. It is supplied to the substrate 13 or an LED signal (a signal for designating an LED lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the LED control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The LED control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37, drives the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 based on the LED signal, and is in a manner specified by the LED signal. The frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 are turned on / off. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the LED.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, LED lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, LED signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, LED signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the LED control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state at the time when the power supply is stopped is restored, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change state, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process (step S25A). When the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, the execution and hold management of the first special symbol game are realized (details will be described later). Further, the CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process (step S25B). When the CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, the execution and hold management of the second special symbol game are realized. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to simultaneously execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel.

Following the first special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process, the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process process (step S25C). When the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process process for each timer interrupt, it is possible to control the big hit game state, the small hit game state, the game state, and the like (details will be described later).

Following the accessory control process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

Further, although the description is omitted in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt process, a test terminal is a process for outputting a test signal so that the control state of the game machine can be confirmed outside the game machine. Processing is also executed. In the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 also controls to output a test signal (right-handed test signal) that can identify the period during which the right-handed operation is performed. Specifically, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 controls to output a right-handed test signal during the big hit game, during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, and during the KT state. On the other hand, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 does not control to output a right-handed test signal during the small hit game based on the variation display of the first special symbol.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process process. In this first special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the first start winning determination process (step S101A).

In the first start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning in the first starting winning opening, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the first hold storage number is executed. When a start prize is generated in the first start prize opening, a random value for determining a display result (including a jackpot type) and a fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information in the first hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102. Will be done. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the first hold storage number, transmission for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination results such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the first hold memory number, and the look-ahead determination on the effect control board 12. The settings are made. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is controlled by the main board 11 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the first special symbol process process is completed. It is transmitted to the substrate 12.

After executing the first start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110A to S113A according to the value of the first special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110A to S113A) of the first special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The first special symbol normal process in step S110A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this first special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reserved information and the like. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the first special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as "big hit" or "small hit" or "big hit" is set based on the random value for determining the display result. The jackpot type of the case is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. .. After that, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal processing ends.

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The first variation pattern setting process in step S111A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “1”. In this first fluctuation pattern setting process, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are set using random values for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". It includes processing to decide which one to use. In the first variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the first variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is specified, and it is also called a variable display pattern.

The first special symbol variation process in step S112A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “2”. In this first special symbol variation process, the process of setting the first special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol are measured. Processing to be done is included. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the first special symbol variation processing ends. To do.

In this example, since the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) is performed. When the variable display of the special symbol is being displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol may result in a small hit and be controlled by the small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the second special figure process flag is before the small hit is released. (Determine whether or not the value corresponds to the processing to the small hit end processing), and if the small hit game is in progress, the value of the first special figure process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the first special symbol variation processing. As a result, the value of the first special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop process unless the small hit game is in progress. By performing such control, the variation display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. It is controlled to do. Not limited to such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol is interrupted (timer). It may be configured to suspend the update).

Further, for example, the small hit ending period as the small hit end processing period may be configured to be different depending on the game state. For example, if the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted in the normal state, the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes long, and the execution period and the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol become longer. If the difference becomes large, it is necessary to absorb the interruption period by stopping the shaking of the decorative pattern, which gives the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable to make the small hit ending period shorter than the KT state (first KT state, second KT state). In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the normal state, whereas the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the KT state.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, for example, in the first KT state, it is practically difficult for the game ball to win a prize in the small hit control, and no particular effect is performed. Therefore, the small hit ending period is shorter than in the second KT state. It may be configured to do so. On the other hand, in the second KT state, the game ball is easy to win in the small hit control, and the effect of emphasizing the small hit control is executed. Therefore, the small hit ending period may be longer than in the first KT state. .. In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, whereas the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the second KT state.

Further, regarding the small hit fanfare period as the small hit opening pretreatment period, the length of the period may be different depending on the game state, as in the above-mentioned small hit ending period.

The first special symbol stop process in step S113A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “3”. In this first special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A stops the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). The process of making settings is included. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the setting process for starting the big hit game is performed. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", a process for starting the small hit game is performed. Then, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. .. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop process ends.

The process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is the same as the process executed in the first special symbol process process (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process process described with reference to FIG. 5, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol process process will be explained. Further, each random number value extracted by the first start winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored in the second hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as hold information.

In this example, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. Therefore, for example, the transition to the second special symbol variation process is performed to change the second special symbol. When the display is in progress, a small hit may occur in the variable display of the first special symbol, and the game may be controlled by a small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the first special figure process flag is before the small hit is released. (Determine whether or not the value corresponds to the processing to the small hit end processing), and if the small hit game is in progress, the value of the second special figure process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the second special symbol variation processing. As a result, the value of the second special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop process unless the small hit game is in progress. By performing such control, the variation display of the second special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. It is controlled to do. Not limited to such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol is interrupted (timer It may be configured to suspend the update).

Regarding the small hit control based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the length of the small hit fanfare period and the small hit ending period may be different depending on the game state.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25C shown in FIG. 4 as the accessory control process process. In this accessory control process process, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S120 to S128 according to the value of the accessory control process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S120 to S128) of the accessory control process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The bonus control normal process in step S120 is executed when the value of the bonus control process flag is “0”. In this bonus control normal process, it is monitored whether or not the setting for starting the big hit game is made, and if the setting for starting the big hit game is made, the process for starting the big hit game is performed. , The value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "1".

The gate passage waiting process in step S121 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “1”. In this gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41. When the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41 is detected, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "2".

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S122 is executed when the accessory control process flag is “2”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for keeping the big winning opening in the open state and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S123 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “3”. This big hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23, and the like. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "4" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. , End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The jackpot release post-processing in step S124 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “4”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit execution number, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit execution number, the accessory control process The value of the flag is updated to "5". When the value of the accessory control process flag is updated, the processing after opening the jackpot ends.

The jackpot end processing in step S125 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “5”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control, KT control, and high-base control. When such a setting is made, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S126 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “6”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the special winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "7", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S127 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “7”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the special winning opening is opened and the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "8", and the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S128 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “8”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 7. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 7 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). In addition, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation in the decorative light emitting body such as the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED, and the driving of the movable body 32. Controls such as operation to operate various production devices are performed. In addition, the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices is determined, determined, set, and the like according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 7 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 8, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the lookahead advance notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead advance notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, and setting for executing the look-ahead advance notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or, driving the movable body 32, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the LED control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of the prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature section 028IW)
Next, the feature unit 028IW will be described. First, the gaming state in the feature unit 028IW will be described. First, the gaming state in the feature unit 028IW includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Further, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state, and in this feature unit 028IW, the gaming state is set to a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). When it is controlled, when it is controlled to the first KT state (low probability / first KT state) with low probability, and when it is controlled to the first KT state (high probability / first KT state) with high probability. , High probability and may be controlled to the second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

In the first KT state, as will be described later, a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in the open state, but the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is extremely long, and the small hit Even if the above occurs, there are very few cases where the game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur and is controlled to a high base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B becomes long. Further, in the second KT state of the KT state, as will be described later, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is moved to the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side. Easy to win. Specifically, in the second KT state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur and is controlled to a low base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is shortened.

In addition, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in this feature unit 028IW, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. Then, while the ratio of small hits is low when the first special symbol changes, the ratio of small hits is high when the second special symbol changes (however, it will be described later). (Except for the case of forced loss), the KT state is set to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, small hits are frequently generated by mainly changing the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player.

The configuration for setting the KT state to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state is the same as in the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol changes. By configuring the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of fluctuations to a certain time is higher in the KT state than in the normal state, and the KT state is set to the normal state. It may be in a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur.

Further, the feature unit 028IW is configured so that the time required from the game ball passing through the passing gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation position of the passing gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, and the nail group forming the flow path of the game ball. As will be described in detail later, the feature unit 028IW has a configuration in which the variable winning ball device 6B can be controlled to the open state based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41, and the game ball passes in the first KT state described later. The time from passing through the gate 41 until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passing gate 41. Since it is shorter than 0.6 seconds, which is the time required for the game to be played, when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state when one game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the first KT state, the one The game ball can be directly entered into the variable winning ball device 6B.

Further, in this example, when a game ball wins in the large winning opening, the ball payout device (not shown) is driven by the payout control microcomputer (not shown) mounted on the payout control board, and 15 prizes are awarded. The ball is paid out. Further, in this example, when a game ball wins in the special winning opening, the ball payout device is driven by the payout control microcomputer mounted on the payout control board, and 10 prize balls are paid out.

(Big hit probability, small hit probability)
9-1 and 9-2 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the big hit probability and the small hit probability for each set value. Of these, FIG. 9-1 shows the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. Further, FIG. 9-2 shows the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. In this example, it is configured so that it can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different), and when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to check the current setting value or change the setting value by executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process. Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Not only when the setting can be changed in 6 steps, for example, the setting may be changed in 2 to 5 steps, or the setting may be changed in 7 or more steps.

First, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 9-1. In the example shown in FIG. 9-1 (A), in the non-probability state (low probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "247/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-1 (B), in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the overall jackpot winning probability is 10 times higher than that in the non-probability state (low probability state). When the value is "1", the jackpot probability is "2050/65536", which is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the case of the set value "6" has the highest jackpot probability "2470/65536". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A) and 9-1 (B), regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the non-probability changing state (low probability). The small hit probability is constant as "6298/65536" regardless of whether it is a state) or a probability variation state (high probability state). That is, in this example, the determination value for small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is common to the non-probability change state and the probability change state. As shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A) and 9-1 (B), even when the jackpot probability is configured to be constant while the jackpot probability is made different according to the set value in this way, the missed probability is lost. Is different in the set values "1" to "6" so that the number of determination values for each set value is matched.

Next, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 9-2. In the example shown in FIG. 9-2 (A), in the non-probability state (low probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "247/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-2 (B), in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the overall jackpot winning probability is 10 times higher than that in the non-probability state (low probability state). When the value is "1", the jackpot probability is "2050/65536", which is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the case of the set value "6" has the highest jackpot probability "2470/65536". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 9-2 (A) and 9-2 (B), regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the non-probability state (low probability). The small hit probability is constant as "32768/65536" regardless of whether it is a state) or a probability change state (high probability state). That is, in this example, the determination value for small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is common to the non-probability change state and the probability change state. As shown in FIGS. 9-2 (A) and 9-2 (B), even when the jackpot probability is configured to be constant while the jackpot probability is made different according to the set value in this way, the missed probability is lost. Is different in the set values "1" to "6" so that the number of determination values for each set value is matched.

In this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, all the judgment values corresponding to the deviation are set. It is included in the determination values corresponding to the set values "1" to "6" (as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, there is no set value in which the probability of loss is 0). Then, the determination value corresponding to the deviation differs depending on the set value (as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, depending on which of the set values "1" to "6". , The probability of loss is different).

Not limited to the mode shown in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol or the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, for example, when the probability of loss is 0 (that is, the determination corresponding to the loss). It may be configured so that there is a setting value) that does not include a value. For example, at the set value "6" having the highest advantage (highest jackpot probability), the loss probability may be 0, and the determination value corresponding to the loss may not be included.

Further, not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, there may be a case where the small hit probability is 0 (that is, a judgment value that does not include the judgment value corresponding to the small hit). For example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol (FIG. 9-1), the small hit probability may be uniformly set to 0 so that the judgment value for the small hit is not included. Good.

In addition, in FIGS. 9-1 (A) and 9-2 and 9-2 (A) and 9-2 (B), the probability change state is executed when the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are executed. The small hit probability is matched and the miss probability is different between the (high probability state) and the non-probability state (low probability state), but in the probability change state (high probability state), the non-probability change state (low probability state) As the jackpot probability increases, the small hit probability may be lower than in the non-probability state (low probability state), and the miss probability may be matched. Further, even if the set values are different in, for example, "1" and "2", the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be matched respectively. As a result, in a game machine in which the number of stages that can be substantially set is less than 6 or a game machine in which there is no difference in advantage due to the setting change function, a type of game machine having a setting change function in 6 stages and a hardware / software configuration. Can be standardized and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

(Big hit type judgment table)
9-3 (A) and 9-3 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is set to "2R normal jackpot", "2R probability variation jackpot", "2R probability variation jackpot" based on the random number for hit type determination. It is a table referred to for determining either "6R normal jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot", or "10R probability variation jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 9-3 (A), in the feature unit 028IW, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6", There is a 9% chance that it will be a "10R probability variation jackpot", a 56% chance that it will be a "6R probability variation jackpot", and a 35% chance that it will be a "6R normal jackpot". Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), in this feature unit 028IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6". Is determined to be a "10R probability variation jackpot" with a 10% probability, a "6R probability variation jackpot" with a 50% probability, a "2R probability variation jackpot" with a 5% probability, and a "2R probability variation jackpot" with a 35% probability. 2R normal jackpot "is determined.

The "10R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 16 rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Further, the "6R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Further, the "2R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends.

The "6R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Further, the "2R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and is controlled to a low probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

In this feature unit 028IW, when "10R probability variation jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot", and "6R normal jackpot" are obtained, a predetermined period (30 seconds in this example) elapses in each round of the jackpot game. The large winning openings are controlled to be open until a fixed number of game balls (10 in this example) are won, and a maximum of 10 large winning openings can be won in each round. On the other hand, in the case of "2R probability variation big hit" and "2R normal big hit", the big winning opening is controlled to be open only for a short period (1.8 seconds in this example) in each round of the big hit game. The number of winnings to the large winning openings that can be won in each round is about 2 to 3.

Further, in this feature unit 028IW, when the big hit game is finished, it is controlled to either the first KT state, the second KT state, or the non-KT state according to the game state before the big hit game and the big hit type. The method of transitioning the gaming state after the jackpot game will be described later (see FIGS. 9-22).

Further, in this example, in the normal symbol process process (step S26), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the variation display result of the normal symbol is a hit (per ordinary symbol), and based on the determination result, the normal symbol is displayed. The control to execute the variable display is performed, but in this example, 99/100 is uniformly performed regardless of whether or not it is in the probabilistic state, whether or not it is in the KT state, or whether or not it is in the high base state. It is decided to hit the normal symbol with the probability of. Further, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a high base flag indicating that the high base state is set is set, and if the high base flag is set (if the high base state is set), the variable winning ball device 6B Is controlled to open for a long period of 5.5 seconds, and if the high base flag is not set (if it is in a low base state), the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a short period of 0.2 seconds. Control.

(Variation pattern table)
9-4 to 9-6 are explanatory views showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol used in the feature unit 028IW. The EXT shown in FIGS. 9-4 to 9-6 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each fluctuation pattern.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-4 to 9-6, nine types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 09 for the first special symbol and decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and decorative symbol. 35 types of # 01 to # 35 are used. Hereinafter, for example, when the fluctuation pattern #n (n = 01 to 09 or 11 to 33) is used, it means both the first fluctuation pattern #n and the second fluctuation pattern #n.

When executing the variation display of the first special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the first special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 9-4 (A). The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 06.

When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if it is in the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), it is shown in FIG. 9-4 (B). The first special symbol variation pattern table for KT shown is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 07 to # 09.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, when it is in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the second special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 9-5 (C) The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-5 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 03. Specifically, when it is determined to be out of alignment, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 10 minutes. Further, when it is determined to be a small hit, the second variation pattern # 02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 10 minutes. Further, when the jackpot is determined, the second variation pattern # 03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain long period of 5 minutes.

In this feature unit 028IW, even in the non-KT state, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs, a situation occurs in which a certain amount of prize balls can be expected due to the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening. I will end up. Therefore, in this feature unit 028IW, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (C), even if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the fluctuation time is made extremely long and the execution frequency of the fluctuation display is executed. By reducing the number of small hits, the frequency of small hits is reduced, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which a small hit is aimed at winning a prize ball even in a non-KT state. In this feature unit 028IW, the "frequency of small hits" is, for example, the rate of occurrence of small hits per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example, small hits per unit time. The rate of occurrence of is higher than the normal state.

In this feature unit 028IW, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time even if it is a big hit. By making the time relatively long, 5 minutes, it is possible to prevent the act of aiming at the prize ball by unreasonably winning a prize in the special winning opening during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the digestion of the first reserved memory as compared with the case of a small hit, so the fluctuation time is configured to be shorter than in the case of a small hit. There is.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the low probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, when executing the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 9-5 (D) is selected and fluctuates. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-5 (D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, any one of the second variation patterns # 04 to # 06. Will be decided.

As shown in FIG. 9-5 (D), when it is determined that the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state is out of alignment, the second fluctuation is a relatively long fluctuation time of 7 seconds. Pattern # 04 (variable pattern for preparing to open the second starting winning opening) is determined. In addition, when it is determined that a small hit is the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 05 (opening of the second start winning opening), which is a relatively long fluctuation time of 7 seconds as a small hit. It is determined by the fluctuation pattern for preparation). In this feature unit 028IW, as described above, when controlled to the first KT state, the frequency of small hits increases, but by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning is actually achieved. The special winning opening in the ball device 17 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special variable winning ball is immediately available. If the device 17 is controlled to be in the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will win the special winning opening. Therefore, in this feature unit 028IW, by securing a fluctuation time of at least 7 seconds in the first fluctuation of the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 can be used even before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 17 to the open state after a sufficient time has elapsed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member fall, it is possible to win a prize in the special winning opening. It prevents the situation where a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the 1KT state. Further, when the big hit is determined as the first variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 06 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for 2 minutes.

In addition, if the fluctuation display of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is executed, FIG. 9-5 (Fig. 9-5) The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / 1st KT and the 2nd to 49th fluctuations shown in E) is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 9-5 (E), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation patterns # 07 to # 13 It is decided to be either.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (E), when it is determined that the fluctuation time is out of the range of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds, and the second fluctuation pattern # It may be determined to be 07 or the second fluctuation pattern # 08 of the shortened fluctuation whose fluctuation time is as short as 1 second. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state are out of order, the second fluctuation pattern # 09 with reach may be determined. The second variation pattern # 07 is a variation pattern that can be selected only when the second hold storage is not stored, and the second variation pattern # 08 can be selected only when one or more second hold memories are stored. It is a fluctuation pattern. As a result, the reserved memory is quickly digested and the operating rate is increased.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (E), when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds, and the second fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation is determined. It may be determined by # 10 or the second fluctuation pattern # 11 of the shortened fluctuation whose fluctuation time is as short as 1 second. On the other hand, when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 12 with reach may be determined. The second variation pattern # 10 is a variation pattern that can be selected only when the second hold storage is not stored, and the second variation pattern # 11 can be selected only when one or more second hold memories are stored. It is a fluctuation pattern. As a result, the reserved memory is quickly digested and the operating rate is increased.

Further, when the jackpot is determined as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 13 with reach is determined.

In addition, the 50th variation display (that is, the final variation in the low probability / 1st KT state) is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed. If this is the case, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and 50th variation shown in FIG. 9-5 (F) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-5 (F), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 50th variation in the low probability / first KT state, any one of the second variation patterns # 14 to # 16. Will be decided.

In the feature unit 028IW, when the low probability / first KT state is controlled, for example, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as “during chance time”. As shown in FIG. 9-5 (F), when it is determined that the 50th variation in the low probability / first KT state is out of range, the image display device 5 displays characters such as "chance time ends !!" The second variation pattern # 14 with display is determined. Further, when a small hit is determined as the 50th variation in the low probability / 1st KT state, the second variation pattern # 15 accompanied by an end display for displaying characters such as "chance time end !!" on the image display device 5. Will be decided. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (F), when a big hit is determined as the 50th variation of the low probability / first KT state, a character display such as "chance time ends !!" is displayed on the image display device 5. A second variation pattern # 16 is determined with a predetermined revival display after the end display to be performed.

In addition, in this feature unit 028IW, as shown in FIG. 9-4, when a big hit is made in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first fluctuation pattern # 09 with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is displayed. It is configured to determine. This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is set to a long fluctuation time, Since the change of the second special symbol executed during the big hit change of the first special symbol is configured to be a forced loss, the forced loss occurs frequently even in the second KT state, and the player makes a small hit. You will not be able to receive any profit from this. Therefore, in this feature unit 028IW, by setting the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol to a short fluctuation time, the game shifts to the jackpot gaming state based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol before the forced loss occurs frequently. It is configured.

In addition, unlike this feature unit 028IW, even if the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is not forcibly missed (for example, the first). If the game machine has a configuration in which the second special symbol is forcibly removed when the second special symbol is changing when the special symbol jackpot symbol is stopped), the fluctuation time of the jackpot of the first special symbol in the KT state May be a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case where a jackpot occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot is set to the same short fluctuation time as the outlier, the player You will not be able to receive any profit from small hits. Therefore, if the fluctuation time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the KT state is a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, a sufficient time that a small hit can occur at least a plurality of times. (For example, 1 minute) is configured to be secured.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability / first KT state, the variation after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is completed. Select the variation pattern table according to the number of times. In this case, if the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation is executed, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 9-6 (G) is selected and fluctuates. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-6 (G), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first fluctuation in the high probability / first KT state, any one of the second fluctuation patterns # 17 to # 21 Will be decided.

As in the case of the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (G), when it is determined that the first variation in the high probability / first KT state is out of order, the second start is performed. The fluctuation pattern for preparing to open the winning opening (second fluctuation pattern # 17) may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first variation in the high probability / first KT state is out of order, the second variation pattern # 18 with reach may be determined. Further, when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the variation pattern for preparing to open the second starting winning opening (second variation pattern # 19) may be determined. On the other hand, when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 20 with reach may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (G), when the jackpot is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 21 with reach is determined.

Further, in the case of executing the variation display after the second variation after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is completed, the high shown in FIG. 9-6 (H). Probability / The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the first KT and the second and subsequent fluctuations is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 9-6 (H), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, any of the second fluctuation patterns # 22 to # 28 Is decided.

As in the case of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / 1st KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (H), when it is determined that the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / 1st KT state are out of order, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (H). The second fluctuation pattern # 22 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds and the second fluctuation pattern # 23 of the shortened fluctuation with a shorter fluctuation time of 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state are out of order, the second fluctuation pattern # 24 with reach may be determined. The second variation pattern # 22 is a variation pattern that can be selected only when the second hold storage is not stored, and the second variation pattern # 23 can be selected only when one or more second hold memories are stored. It is a fluctuation pattern. As a result, the reserved memory is quickly digested and the operating rate is increased.

Further, when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is shortened to 5 seconds, the second fluctuation pattern # 25, and the fluctuation time is further shortened to 1 second. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 26 of the fluctuation. On the other hand, when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 27 with reach may be determined. The second variation pattern # 25 is a variation pattern that can be selected only when the second hold storage is not stored, and the second variation pattern # 26 can be selected only when one or more second hold memories are stored. It is a fluctuation pattern. As a result, the reserved memory is quickly digested and the operating rate is increased.

Further, when the jackpot is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 28 with reach is determined.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the case of the high probability / second KT state, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for the high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 9-6 (I) is displayed. It is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-6 (I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 29 to # 35. ..

As shown in FIG. 9-6 (I), when the deviation is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 29 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is determined. In some cases, the fluctuation time is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 30 of the normal fluctuation of 5 seconds. On the other hand, when it is determined to be out of order in the high probability / second KT state, the variation time may be as long as 2 minutes and the second variation pattern # 31 accompanied by the battle effect may be determined. Further, when the small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the fluctuation time is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 32 of the shortened fluctuation as short as 1.5 seconds, or the fluctuation time is usually 5 seconds. The second fluctuation pattern # 33 of the fluctuation may be determined. On the other hand, when the small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the variation time may be as long as 2 minutes and the second variation pattern # 34 accompanied by the battle effect may be determined. Further, when the big hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the fluctuation time is as long as 2 minutes and the second fluctuation pattern # 35 accompanied by the battle effect is determined.

In this example, if a deviation or a small hit occurs when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the second KT state, the second variation pattern # 30 or the second variation pattern # 33 is determined. The ratio is large, and it is easy to execute the variation display of the decorative pattern with the variation time of 3 seconds.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state will be described. FIG. 9-7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state. Further, FIG. 9-7 (1) shows an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state, and FIG. 9-7 (2) shows the variable winning ball device in the second KT state. The opening pattern of 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 is shown.

First, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 9-7 (1). As shown in FIG. 9-7 (1), when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 executes a variable display of the normal symbol. When it is determined to be a normal symbol hit, the hit symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20, and when it is determined to be out of order, the off symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. In this feature unit 028IW, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (1), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time for deriving and displaying the hit symbol or the missed symbol is 0.2 seconds. ing. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (1), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the time before the second start winning opening opening process is 0.1 seconds. After that, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 1.5 seconds, and the game ball is won in the special winning opening. It will be in a possible state. However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (1), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side is as short as 1.5 seconds, whereas the variable winning ball device on the upstream side is The opening time of 6B is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation display).

In the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is completed, the next variable winning ball device 6B can be opened in the next normal symbol. After a lapse of at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time of 0.1 seconds before opening the second start winning opening. Therefore, in the feature unit 028IW, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened.

Further, in the feature unit 028IW, in the first KT state, after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state. After 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time before opening the second start winning opening of 0.1 seconds, the game ball The time required from passing through the passing gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the state where the normal symbol is not changed until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is longer. Since the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 to when the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B is shorter than the time when the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is already open. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B when the state is controlled. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed is likely to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 9-7 (2). As shown in FIG. 9-7 (2), when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 executes a variable display of the normal symbol. When it is determined to be a normal symbol hit, the hit symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20, and when it is determined to be out of order, the off symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. In this feature unit 028IW, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (2), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1.0 second, and the symbol confirmation time for deriving and displaying the hit symbol and the missed symbol is 0.2 second. ing. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (2), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the time before the second start winning opening processing is 2.6 seconds. After that, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 0.2 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 1.5 seconds, and the game ball is won in the special winning opening. It will be possible.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is as short as 0.2 seconds. Further, in the feature unit 028IW, in the second KT state, the interval period (closing period) after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened is at least 3.8 seconds (normal symbol variation time 1.0 second + symbol confirmation time 0). A relatively long period of .2 seconds + time before the opening process of the second start winning opening is 2.6 seconds) is secured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (2), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short and the interval period (closing period) is long, so that it is compared with the first KT state. It is easy for the game ball to enter the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side, and it is easy for the game ball to win the special winning opening.

In the second KT state, a game ball is easily won in the special winning opening and a prize ball is easily obtained. Therefore, in this example, it is also called "small hit RUSH", and in the second KT state, "small hit RUSH". Character display such as "is displayed.

Further, in the feature unit 028IW, in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed. After the lapse of 3.8 seconds, which is the sum of the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1.0 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time of 2.6 seconds before opening the second start winning opening, the game ball The time required from passing through the passing gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 to when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state in the state where the normal symbol is not changed is longer. Since it is longer than the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 until the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B before being controlled by. Therefore, in the second KT state, it is difficult for the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

In the feature unit 028IW, the process of executing the variable display of the normal symbol and opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B is the normal symbol process process by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103). This is done by executing (see step S26). Further, in the normal symbol process processing of step S26, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the game state is a probabilistic state (high probability state), and whether it is a non-KT state, a first KT state, or a second KT state. Regardless of whether or not there is a big hit game state, it is determined whether or not to make a normal figure hit with the same probability (for example, 99/100).

In this feature unit 028IW, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the symbol confirmation time are the same for each of 0.2 seconds in the first KT state and the second KT state, and the time before the opening processing of the second start winning opening is the second. The case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B is changed by shortening it to 0.1 seconds in the 1KT state and lengthening it to 2.6 seconds in the second KT state has been shown, but only in such a mode. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be different by making the fluctuation time and the symbol determination time different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second start winning opening opening process after the variable winning ball device 6B is closed can be controlled, and the time after the second starting winning opening opening process differs between the first KT state and the second KT state. The closed period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be different depending on the setting. In particular, if the variable winning ball device 6B in the first KT state is configured to have a shorter closing period (interval period) by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress winning of the special winning opening in the first KT state. ..

As will be described later, in the feature unit 028IW, in the first KT state, by setting a high base flag indicating that the high base state is set, the high base state is controlled, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (1). As described above, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled so that the opening time is long. Further, in the second KT state, by controlling to the low base state without setting the high base flag, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (2), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be short. ing.

For example, a special flag (opening extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, it is as shown in FIG. 9-7 (1). The variable winning ball device 6B is controlled by the first opening pattern (long opening) that opens for a long time, and if the special flag is not set, the variable winning ball device 6B shown in FIG. 9-7 (2) is opened for a short time. It may be configured to control with a two-open pattern (short open). That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and the special flag may not be set in other states including the big hit game state.

Further, even in the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be shortened when the final variation display in the low probability / first KT state is executed. For example, out of the 50 times shortened fluctuation period of the special symbol in the low probability / first KT state, the above-mentioned special flag may be deleted in response to the 49th stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the variable winning ball device 6B being long open when performing a left-handed notification after the end of the low probability / first KT state. be able to.

In addition, as described above, when the variable winning ball device 6B is configured by using the flag (special flag) for opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B, the flag for shortening the variation display of the special symbol is further used. The variation display of the special symbol may be controlled. In this case, the special flag and the flag for shortening variation may be managed and controlled separately.

Further, the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to be short-opened in the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to have a high opening probability in a low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are fired. It is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 6B from winning a prize, and it is possible to prevent a right-handed operation from being performed during a low probability / non-KT state.

In this feature unit 028IW, as shown in FIG. 9-7, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is, for example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long fluctuation time is executed in the first KT state, the variable winning ball is in the state where the normal symbol is stopped changing and there is no hold memory of the normal symbol. This is because the device 6B is in the closed state, and it is possible to capture the second special symbol aiming at the fluctuation stop timing (in the case of a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the passing gate By the time the game ball that has passed through 41 reaches the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, the variable winning ball device 6B does not open, and the special winning opening can be won). On the other hand, in this feature unit 028IW, by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 6B. Is set to start, so that it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the launch operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the variation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

(Direction control command)
9-8 and 9-9 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. In the example shown in FIG. 9-8, the commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8033 (H) are decorations that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. This is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of a symbol. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8033 (H), the image display device 5 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Control.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is to be missed. The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (10R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 10R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (6R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 6R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 6R normal jackpot. .. The command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 2R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 2R normal jackpot. .. The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 7 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this feature unit 028IW, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a display result specification command immediately before the variation pattern command, so that the display result specification command received by the effect control CPU 120 immediately before the first variation pattern command is Since it can be determined that the display result specification command is for the first special symbol, and the display result specification command received immediately before the second variation pattern command is a display result specification command for the second special symbol, the display result is displayed. The designation command can be used for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the display result designation command for the first special symbol and the display result designation command for the second special symbol may be separated.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 does not send a display result designation command, but corresponds to each of 10R probability variation jackpot / 6R probability variation jackpot / 6R normal jackpot / 2R probability variation jackpot / 2R normal jackpot / small hit / miss. The variation pattern command may be determined, and the effect control CPU 120 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

The command 9C00 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting end designation command) for designating that the right-handed display 26 has finished lighting. The command 9C01 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting start designation command) for designating that the right-handed display 26 has started lighting.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol.

The command A002 (H) is an effect control command (first forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped. The command A003 (H) is an effect control command (second forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped.

The command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the jackpot game. B001 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command: ending designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during the opening of the big winning opening) that specifies the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big winning opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a prize in the prize opening) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the prize opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the second start winning opening in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. It should be noted that a command indicating the first reserved storage number may be transmitted as the first valid start winning prize designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved storage number may be transmitted as the second valid start winning winning designation command, but this feature unit 028IW Then, the first effective start prize designation command and the second valid start prize designation command are commands indicating that there is a start prize.

The command C801 (H) is an effect control command (gate passage designation command) for designating that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

The command D000 (H) is an effect control command (first customer) that specifies that it is in the first customer waiting state (the state in which the first special symbol is not changed and the first hold memory is not stored). Wait demo display specification command). The command D001 (H) is an effect control command (second customer) that specifies that it is in the second customer waiting state (the state in which the second special symbol is not changed and the second hold memory is not stored). Wait demo display specification command). The first customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. Further, the second customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / non-KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the low probability / non-KT state. The command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / first KT state. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / second KT state.

The command E1XX (H) is an effect control command (setting value command) for designating the currently set setting value. A set value is set in "XX". For example, when the set value is set to "1", the command E101 (H) is transmitted as the set value command. Further, for example, when the set value is set to "6", the command E106 (H) is transmitted as the set value command.

When the effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 9-8 and 9-9, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the voice control board 13. It should be noted that the effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 9-8 and 9-9 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating the game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

(Starting prize judgment process)
FIG. 9-10 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process. Of these, FIG. 9-10 (A) shows a flowchart of the first start winning determination process (step S101A) executed in the first special symbol process process (step S25A). Further, FIG. 9-10 (B) shows a flowchart of the second start winning determination process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S25B).

First, the first start winning determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 9-10 (A). In the first start winning determination process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 028IWS1211A). If the first start port switch 22A is not in the ON state, the process ends as it is. When the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first hold storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first hold storage for counting the first hold storage number). (Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4) is confirmed (step 028IWS1212A). If the number of first reserved storage reaches the upper limit, the process ends as it is.

If the first hold storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 103 increments the value of the first hold storage number counter by 1 (step 028IWS1213A). Next, the CPU 103 extracts values from counters for generating each random number such as a hit determination random number, a hit type determination random number, and a fluctuation pattern determination random number, and stores them in a storage area in the first hold storage buffer. (Step 028IWS1214A). A storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the number of first reserved storages (4 in this example) is secured in the first reserved storage buffer and is formed in the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first effective start winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 028IWS1215A).

Next, the second start winning determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 9-10 (B). In the second start winning determination process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 028IWS1211B). If the second start port switch 22B is not in the ON state, the process ends as it is. When the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second hold storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second hold storage for counting the second hold storage number). (Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4) is confirmed (step 028IWS1212B). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the process ends as it is.

If the second hold storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 103 increments the value of the second hold storage number counter by 1 (step 028IWS1213B). Next, the CPU 103 extracts values from counters for generating each random number such as a hit determination random number, a hit type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination random number, and stores them in a storage area in the second hold storage buffer. (Step 028IWS1214B). A storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the number of second reserved storages (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer and is formed in the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the second effective start winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 028IWS1215B).

(1st special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 9-11 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process process. The state in which the first special symbol normal processing is executed is when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A. The case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A is a state in which the first special symbol display device 4A does not display the variation of the first special symbol.

In the first special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120). Confirm whether or not (step 028IWS50A). In addition, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step 028IWS51A). Specifically, the count value of the first hold storage counter is confirmed. If the first hold storage number is 0, the first customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 028IWS52A).

If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102, and reads the random number value of the RAM 102. While storing in the first random number buffer area (step 028IWS53A), the value of the first reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step 028IWS54A). That is, each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first hold storage buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the first hold storage number = n-1. Store in the storage area corresponding to. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order of the first reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified. In this example, each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are The order of extraction is also identifiable and saved.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 028IWS55A). In this example, by executing the process of step 028IWS55A, the setting value command is transmitted every time the fluctuation display is started. However, the setting change process (process of changing the set value) when the power is turned on. The setting value command is also sent when is executed.

The timing of sending the setting value command is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, the setting value command is configured to be transmitted at each end of the fluctuation display, or the setting value command is transmitted during the fluctuation display. It may be configured to do so.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 028IWS56A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag and the high base flag are off, it is determined that the state is low probability / non-KT, and the low probability / non-KT background specification command is executed. The probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on. In some cases, it is determined that the state is low probability / 1st KT, and the low probability / 1st KT background specification command is executed. If the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is on, the command is high probability / 1st KT state. If the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off, the high probability / second KT state is determined and the high accuracy / second KT background specification command is executed. Send.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the second special symbol is in progress (step 028IWS57A). Specifically, when the second jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress. When it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step 028IWS69A without performing the processing after step 028IWS58A. As a result, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly removing the material is not limited to the above. For example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is changing in step 028IWS57A, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of order as a random number for hit determination is performed, and by shifting to step 028IWS59A, at the time of starting winning. Regardless of which hit determination random number has been acquired, it may be forcibly removed.

Further, for example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is changing in step 028IWS57A, a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment is set as a random number for hit determination without performing the processing of steps 028IWS58A to S63A. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the first random number storage buffer (step 028IWS58A) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 028IWS59A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when a random number for hit determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step 028IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step 028IWS61A). .. Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is 10R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, or 6R normal jackpot based on the hit type determination random number (step 028IWS62A), the jackpot type is stored (step 028IWS63A), and step 028IWS69A. Move to.

If the big hit is not made in step 028IWS60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 028IWS64A). The small hit determination module is a program that determines that a small hit is determined when a hit determination random number (a random number for small hit determination may be used) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step 028IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first small hit flag indicating that the small hit will be made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step 028IWS65A). Step 028IWS66A). Then, the process proceeds to step 028IWS69A.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the high base state is "0" (step 028IWS69A), and if it is "0", step 028IWS75A. Move to. When the value of the high base count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts the value of the high base count counter by "1" (step 028IWS70A). It is determined whether or not the result is "0" (step 028IWS71A). If the value of the high base count counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 028IWS75A. When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state (step 028IWS72A), and shortens the variation display of the special symbol. The special time reduction flag indicating that control is in progress is reset (step 028IWS73A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed display 26 is extended until the end of the fluctuation (step 028IWS74A). Then, the process proceeds to step 028IWS75A.

In this feature unit 028IW, as will be described later, it is highly probable that the high base flag is set and the number of executions of the fluctuation display in the high base state is managed at the end of the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit. / High base state (low probability / first KT state) is controlled and 50 times of fluctuation display is executed. In the case of low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), when the 50th fluctuation display is started, it is determined as Y in steps 028IWS71A and S71B, and the high base flag is set in steps 028IWS72A and S72B. At the same time as being reset, the special figure time reduction flag is also reset in steps 028IWS73A and S73B, and the state shifts to the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)).

The lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is for continuing the right-handed notification and continuing the right-handed state, and although the high base state has ended as the game state, the fluctuation reduction common to the first KT state is shortened. It is a flag for making the production background common to the first KT state while keeping the state.

In this example, by executing the process of step 028IWS74A or the process of step 028IWS74B described later, the high base state is caused by the start of fluctuation of either the variation display of the first special symbol or the variation display of the second special symbol. When the final fluctuation of (in this example, the 50th fluctuation display) is started, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is set and the fluctuation shortening state is extended. In this case, when the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is set, whether the variation display of the first special symbol or the variation display of the second special symbol (in this example, the 50th variation display) ends. , Or the other special symbol variation display (in this example, the 51st variation display) is reset, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is reset, and the extension of the variation shortening state is completed. Is desirable.

Then, in step 028IWS75A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step 028IWS75A). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step 028IWS75A is confirmed.

In step 028IWS59A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

(1st fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 9-12 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, first, whether or not the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is set with the special figure time reduction flag indicating that the variation display of the special symbol is being shortened. (Step 028IWS1700A). In this example, it is more advantageous to execute the variation display of the second special symbol by setting the special symbol time reduction flag and performing the shortening control of the variation display of the special symbol (Fig. 9-4). (Refer to FIG. 9-6), since a small hit is likely to occur, the state is controlled to the KT state. If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the non-variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-4 (A) as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. The first special symbol variation pattern table for KT is selected (step 028IWS1701A). If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the KT shown in FIG. 9-4 (B) as a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The first special symbol variation pattern table for time is selected (step 028IWS1702A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 is based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 028IWS1701A and S1702A and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. It is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 9-4 is used (step 028IWS1703A). In this example, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern. Further, after the fluctuation time is determined, the fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 028IWS1704A).

Further, when the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step 028IWS1703A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the first fluctuation time timer and the fluctuation time. (Step 028IWS1705A), and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is started (step 028IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process (step 028IWS1707A).

(1st special symbol change processing)
FIG. 9-13 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 028IWS1120A). In addition, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if it has not yet been transmitted, and the jackpot type. Based on the determination result, one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 3 designation command, display result 4 designation command, display result 7 designation command) is sent to the effect control CPU 120. Control for transmission is performed (step 028IWS1121A).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first fluctuation time timer (step 028IWS1122A), and when the first fluctuation time timer times out (step 028IWS1123A), controls to transmit the first symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 028IWS1123A). Step 028IWS1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 028IWS1130A).

When the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 028IWS1125A). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 028IWS1126A). Whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second small hit flag indicating that the small hit is obtained is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol. If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B, the process ends as it is.

In addition, when executing the variation display of the second special symbol, if it is not determined to be a big hit, it may be configured to be a small hit. In that case, the determination process of step 028IWS1126A is omitted. If it is determined to be N in step 028IWS1125A, it may be configured to shift to step 028IWS1127A as it is.

If the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit (step 028IWS1127A). .. It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit can be determined by checking, for example, whether or not the first big hit flag is set. If the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the process is terminated as it is.

If the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit type is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot (step 028IWS1128A). Whether or not it is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 028IWS63A. If it is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot, the process ends as it is.

When the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (Y in step 028IWS1125A) or when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step 028IWS1126A), either the 10R probability variation jackpot or the 6R probability variation jackpot is displayed. When the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed (Y in step 028IWS1127A, N in step 028IWS1128A), the CPU 103 sends the first compulsory symbol to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed to send a confirmation designation command (step 028IWS1129A). In this case, if the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 028IWS1130A).

By executing the processes of steps 028IWS1125A to S1129A, in this feature unit 028IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol. In this case, when the variable display of the first special symbol, which is a normal jackpot (6R normal jackpot in this example), is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and the first special symbol is stopped. And the second special symbol do not cause a big hit or a small hit at the same time. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, if the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly missed, the decorative symbol is changed based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 028IWS1129A. As a display result, control is performed so that the out-of-order symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed.

In this example, the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the probability variation jackpot (in this example, the 10R probability variation jackpot or the 6R probability variation jackpot). If the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed, the first special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see Y in step 028IWS1128A), but in this case, the variation display of the second special symbol is displayed. Based on the small hit, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing (step S126), and the game shifts to the small hit game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, it is determined as N in step 028IWS1120A, the processing of steps 028IWS1121A to S1130A is skipped, and the first fluctuation time timer of step 028IWS1122A is not updated. Therefore, when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a probability variation big hit, is being executed, the first variation time timer is during the small hit game. The update of is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being performed. If there is, the first special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see N in step 028IWS1127A). Therefore, even when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being executed, the first variation is performed during the small hit game. When the update of the time timer is interrupted and the variation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed and the small hit game is completed, the update of the first variation time timer is restarted.

(1st special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 9-14 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 028IWS2010A). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 028IWS2011A). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 028IWS2012A), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 028IWS2013A).

In this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, the person who performs the right-handed operation when the game state is controlled to the KT state. Is advantageous for the player, and the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on. Therefore, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is lit during the low probability / first KT state, but the 50th variation display is displayed by executing the processes of steps 028IWS69A to S74A and S69B to S74B. When starting, the low probability / first KT state is terminated to shift to the normal state (non-KT state), and the processes of steps 028IWS2010A to S2013A and S2010B to S2013B are executed to end the 50th variation display. The right-handed display 26 is turned off.

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 028IWS2014A). In this case, if the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 028IWS1129A of the first special symbol variation processing, it is forced as a stop symbol of the first special symbol regardless of the determination result at the start of the variation. The out-of-target design is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step 028IWS2015A). When the first big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the big hit start flag indicating that the big hit is started (step 028IWS2016A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first jackpot flag (step 028IWS2017A).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 028IWS2018A), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 028IWS2019A). Then, the process proceeds to step 028IWS2027A.

By executing the processes of steps 028IWS2018A and S2019A, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to be lit when a big hit is made in the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the big hit game. The right-handed display 26 is turned on.

In this example, after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the jackpot game is started based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. Therefore, right-handed at the timing when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41. The display 26 may be configured to start lighting.

When the first big hit flag is not set (N in step 028IWS2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first small hit flag is set (step 028IWS2020A). When the first small hit flag is set, control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 028IWS2021A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first small hit flag (step 028IWS2022A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing (step 028IWS2026A). Then, the process proceeds to step 028IWS2027A.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step 028IWS2027A).

In this example, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol, the right-handed notification that urges the player to launch the game ball to the right of the game area can be executed. There is. In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol, a launch promotion notification that urges the player to launch the game ball aiming at the passing gate 41 can be executed as a right-handed notification. You may be.

In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol, the right-handed notification or launch promotion notification is not executed, and when the game ball wins the first start winning opening in that state, the right-handed notification or launch promotion notification is executed. (In this case, since the gate is waiting to pass through, even if the game ball wins in the first start winning opening, the variation display of the first special symbol is not started immediately, and the first hold memory is set). It may be configured as.

On the contrary, when the passage of the game ball at the passing gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is low (for example, low volume sound output or small screen display). Therefore, the player may be configured to perform a left-handed notification prompting the player to launch and operate the game ball to the left of the game area. On the other hand, when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening or the special winning opening is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is high (for example, loud sound output or It may be configured to perform left-handed notification by (large screen display). With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the launch. In particular, with the above configuration, a player who accidentally launches a game ball to the right of the game area is given a slight left-handed notification in a mode in which the degree of recognition to the surroundings of the game machine is low. , The player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation may be configured to perform the left-handed notification in a manner in which the degree of recognition to the surroundings of the game machine is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to urge the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation to return to the left-handed operation from the clerk of the game store.

Further, in the above case, the left-handed notification may be performed when the number of detected game balls at the passing gate 41, the second starting winning opening, and the special winning opening reaches a certain number. Further, when the passing gate 41 detects a game ball a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), a left-handed notification is given, and the second start winning opening and the special winning opening are more than a predetermined number. When a small number (for example, one) or more of game balls are detected, left-handed notification may be performed.

In this feature unit 028IW, the demo display is performed when a specific condition is satisfied, but when the demo display is performed in the normal state, the passage gate 41, the second start winning opening, or the special winning opening is displayed. When the winning of the game ball is detected, the execution of the demo display that has been executed may be terminated and the left-handed notification may be given.

(2nd special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 9-15 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal processing in the second special symbol process processing. The state in which the second special symbol normal processing is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing. In addition, when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing, there is a state in which the second special symbol display device 4B does not display the variation of the second special symbol.

In the second special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120). Confirm whether or not (step 028IWS50B). In addition, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step 028IWS51B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage counter is confirmed. If the second hold storage number is 0, the second customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 028IWS52B).

If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102, and reads the random number value of the RAM 102. While storing in the second random number buffer area (step 028IWS53B), the value of the second reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step 028IWS54B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the second reserved storage number = n-1. Store in the storage area corresponding to. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order of the second reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 028IWS55B). In this example, by executing the process of step 028IWS55B, the setting value command is transmitted every time the fluctuation display is started. However, the setting change process (process of changing the set value) when the power is turned on. The setting value command is also sent when is executed.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 028IWS56B). The specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step 028IWS56A of the first special symbol normal process.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is in progress (step 028IWS57B). Specifically, when the first jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress. When it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step 028IWS69B without performing the processing after step 028IWS58B. As a result, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly removing the material is not limited to the above. For example, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress in step 028IWS57B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of order as a random number for hit determination is performed, and the process shifts to step 028IWS59B. It may be forcibly removed regardless of whether the random number for hit determination has been acquired.

Further, for example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing in step 028IWS57B, a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment is set as a hit determination random number without performing the processing of steps 028IWS58B to S63B. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the second random number storage buffer (step 028IWS58B) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 028IWS59B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when a random number for hit determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step 028IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step 028IWS61B). .. Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 2R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot based on the random number for determining the hit type (step 028IWS62B), and the jackpot type is stored (step 028IWS63B). ), Step 028 IWS69B.

If the big hit is not made in step 028IWS60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 028IWS64B). The small hit determination module is a program that determines that a small hit is determined when a hit determination random number (a random number for small hit determination may be used) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step 028IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small hit flag indicating that the small hit will be made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step 028IWS65B). Step 028IWS66B). Then, the process proceeds to step 028IWS69B.

In addition, when executing the variation display of the second special symbol, if it is not determined to be a big hit, it may be configured to be a small hit, and in that case, the processing of steps 028IWS64B and S65B may be omitted. If it is determined to be N in step 028IWS60B, the process may proceed directly to step 028IWS66B and the second small hit flag may be set.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter is "0" (step 028IWS69B), and if it is "0", the process proceeds to step 028IWS75B. When the value of the high base count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts the value of the high base count counter by "1" (step 028IWS70B). It is determined whether or not the result is "0" (step 028IWS71B). If the value of the high base count counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 028IWS75B. When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state (step 028IWS72B), and shortens the variation display of the special symbol. The special figure time reduction flag indicating that control is in progress is reset (step 028IWS73B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) (step 028IWS74B). Then, the process proceeds to step 028IWS75B.

Then, in step 028IWS75B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second fluctuation pattern setting process (step 028IWS75B). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step 028IWS75B is confirmed.

In step 028IWS59B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

The second variation pattern setting process is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) shown in FIG. 9-12. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 9-12, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process is explained. However, in the second variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first performs the same process as in step 028IWS1700A, and confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set. If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the non-variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-5 (C) as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. Select the second special symbol variation pattern table for KT. If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 fluctuates according to whether or not the probability variation flag and the high base flag are set and the number of fluctuations. As the variation pattern table for determining the pattern, any one of the variation pattern tables for KT shown in FIGS. 9-5 (D) to 9-6 (I) is selected for the second special symbol variation pattern table. For example, if the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability / first KT state), the first variation is the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-5 (D). Select, select the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-5 (E) for the 2nd to 49th variations, and select the second variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-5 (F) for the 50th variation. Select the variable pattern table for special symbols. Further, for example, if both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are on (high probability / first KT state), the first variation is the variation for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-6 (G). The pattern table is selected, and if it is the second variation or later, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-6 (H) is selected. Further, for example, if the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off (in the high probability / second KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-6 (I) is selected.

(2nd special symbol change processing)
FIG. 9-16 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 028IWS1120B). In addition, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if it has not yet been transmitted, and the jackpot type. Based on the decision result, one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 3 designation command, display result 5 designation command, display result 6 designation command, display result 7 designation command) Is controlled to be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 028IWS1121B).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second fluctuation time timer (step 028IWS1122B), and when the second fluctuation time timer times out (step 028IWS1123B), controls to transmit the second symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 028IWS1123B). Step 028IWS1124B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step 028IWS1130B).

When the second fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A (step 028IWS1125B). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is determined by, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A (step 028IWS1126B). Whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is determined by, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not the first small hit flag indicating that a small hit is set is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol. If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A, the process ends as it is.

If the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit (step 028IWS1127B). .. It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit can be determined by checking, for example, whether or not the second big hit flag is set. If the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the process is terminated as it is.

If the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit type is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, or a 2R probability variable jackpot (step 028IWS1128B). .. Whether or not it is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined by checking, for example, the jackpot type stored in step 028IWS63B. If it is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the process ends as it is.

When the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (Y in step 028IWS1125B), or when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step 028IWS1126B), the 10R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, and When the variation display of the second special symbol that is neither a 2R probability variation jackpot (that is, a 2R normal jackpot) is being executed (Y in step 028IWS1127B, N in step 028IWS1128B), the CPU 103 is the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed to send the second forced symbol confirmation designation command to (step 028IWS1129B). In this case, if the second big hit flag or the second small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the second big hit flag or the second small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step 028IWS1130B).

By executing the processes of steps 028IWS1125B to S1129B, in this feature unit 028IW, when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol. In this case, when the variable display of the second special symbol, which is a normal jackpot (2R normal jackpot in this example), is being executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and the first special symbol is stopped. And the second special symbol do not cause a big hit or a small hit at the same time. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, if the change display of the second special symbol is forcibly missed, the decorative symbol is changed based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 028IWS1129B. As a display result, control is performed so that the out-of-order symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed.

In this example, the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the probability variation jackpot (in this example, the 10R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, Or, if the variation display of the second special symbol that becomes the 2R probability variation jackpot) is being executed, the second special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see Y in step 028IWS1128B), but in this case, the first special symbol. Based on the fact that the variation display of the symbol becomes a small hit, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step S126), and the game shifts to the small hit game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, it is determined as N in step 028IWS1120B, the processing of steps 028IWS1121B to S1130B is skipped, and the second fluctuation time timer of step 028IWS1122B is not updated. Therefore, when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol, which is a probability variation big hit, is being executed, the second variation time timer is during the small hit game. The update of the second special symbol is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variation time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being performed. If there is, the second special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see N in step 028IWS1127B). Therefore, even when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being executed, the second variation is performed during the small hit game. The update of the time timer is interrupted, the variation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small hit game is completed, the update of the second variation time timer is restarted.

By configuring as described above, in the normal state after the end of the first KT state (after the end of the reduced working hours state), the remaining second hold memory can be digested, and a big hit occurs at an unintended timing when the player is absent. Can be suppressed.

Further, a variable winning ball device for the first special symbol is provided below the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning opening), and a winning ball device for the second special symbol is provided on the right side of the game area. In a gaming machine configured to provide a starting winning opening, which is not a variable winning ball device, and to shift to a normal state via a time saving state of the first special symbol after the end of the second KT state (small hit RUSH). , As described above, the configuration in which the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed may be applied. In this case, as the fluctuation efficiency of the first special symbol increases, the frequency of small hits based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol also increases, but the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is forcibly missed accordingly. By increasing the frequency of this, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol based on the second hold memory in the normal state, and further suppress the occurrence of the jackpot at the unintended timing when the player is absent. Can be done.

(2nd special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 9-17 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol stop processing. In the second special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 028IWS2010B). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 028IWS2011B). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 028IWS2012B), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 028IWS2013B).

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 028IWS2014B). In this case, if the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 028IWS1129B of the second special symbol variation processing, it is forced as a stop symbol of the second special symbol regardless of the decision result at the start of the variation. The out-of-target design is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second jackpot flag is set (step 028IWS2015B). When the second jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot start flag (step 028IWS2016B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second jackpot flag (step 028IWS2017B).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 028IWS2018B), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 028IWS2019B). Then, the process proceeds to step 028IWS2027B.

By executing the processes of steps 028IWS2018B and S2019B, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to be lit when a big hit is made in the variable display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the big hit game. The right-handed display 26 is turned on.

If the second big hit flag is not set (N in step 028IWS2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second small hit flag is set (step 028IWS2020B). When the second small hit flag is set, control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 028IWS2021B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second small hit flag (step 028IWS2022B).

In addition, when executing the variation display of the second special symbol, if it is not determined to be a big hit, it may be configured to be a small hit. In that case, the process of step 028IWS2020B is omitted and the step When it is determined to be N in 028IWS2015B, it may be configured to shift to step 028IWS2021B as it is.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set (step 028IWS2023B). If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 028IWS2024B), and is right with respect to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed to send a lighting start designation command (step 028IWS2025B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing (step 028IWS2026B). Then, the process proceeds to step 028IWS2027B.

By executing the processing of step 028IWS2024B and S2025B, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to be lit when a small hit is made in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is better for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the small hit game. It is advantageous, and the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on.

However, in this example, even if a small hit is made in the variation display of the second special symbol, the right-handed display 26 should already be lit when the KT state is in effect. Therefore, in this example, by performing the determination process of step 028IWS2023B, if a small hit occurs in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the KT state, the right-handed display 26 is started to light in duplicate. The process of sending a right-handed lighting start specification command is not performed.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step 028IWS2027B).

(Characteristic control normal processing)
FIG. 9-18 is a flowchart showing a bonus control normal process (step S120) in the bonus control process process. In the accessory control normal process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the jackpot start flag is set (step 028IWS2101). If the jackpot start flag is not set, the process ends as it is.

If the jackpot start flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot start flag (step 028IWS2102). Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer before opening the big winning opening (step 028IWS2103), sets the opening pattern data for round 1 according to the big hit type (step 028IWS2104), and sets the round number counter indicating the number of big hit rounds to "1". "(Step 028IWS2105).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the gate passage waiting process (step 028IWS2106).

(Waiting for gate passage)
FIG. 9-19 is a flowchart showing a gate passage waiting process (step S121) in the accessory control process process. In the gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has been input (step 028IWS2501). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has not been input, the process ends as it is. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag, the high base flag, and the special time reduction flag if set, and clears the value of the high base count counter to 0 ( Step 028IWS2502). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (step 028IWS2503), and sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (step 028IWS2504).

In this feature unit 028IW, the jackpot game is not started as soon as the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the second special symbol by executing the gate passage waiting process, but the passage gate 41 is played. It is configured to shift to the jackpot game on condition that the ball has passed and is detected by the gate switch 21.

(Big hit end processing)
FIG. 9-20 is a flowchart showing a jackpot end process (step S125) in the accessory control process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step 028IWS2200), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, proceeds to step 028IWS2202. When the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 corresponds to the display time corresponding to the time when the jackpot end display is performed on the image display device 5 (big hit end display time) on the jackpot end display timer. A value is set (step 028IWS2201), and the process ends.

In step 028IWS2202, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 028IWS2202). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 028IWS2203). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 028IWS2203), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot (step 028IWS2204). Whether or not it is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined by checking, for example, the jackpot type stored in step 028IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing or step 028IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step 028IWS2205). Further, the CPU 103 sets the special figure time reduction flag and shifts to the KT state (step 028IWS2206). Then, the process proceeds to step 028IWS2214. In the case of a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the high base flag is not set, so that the control is performed in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state).

If it is neither a 10R probability variation jackpot nor a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot finished this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot (step 028IWS2207). Whether or not it is a 6R probability variation jackpot can be determined by checking, for example, the jackpot type stored in step 028IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing or step 028IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step 028IWS2208). Further, the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 028IWS2209), and further sets the special figure time reduction flag to shift to the KT state (step 028IWS2210). Then, the process proceeds to step 028IWS2214. Therefore, in the case of a 6R probability variation jackpot, it is controlled to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state).

In the case of a 6R probability variation jackpot, only the high base flag is set, and the high base number counter is not set. In this case, since the high base count counter is reset to 0 when the jackpot game is started (see step 028IWS2502 of the gate passage waiting process), the value of the high base count counter remains 0. Therefore, after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot is completed, it is controlled to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and the value of the high base count counter is 0 in the subsequent fluctuation display. It is determined as Y in step 028IWS69A of the first special symbol normal processing and step 028IWS69B of the second special symbol normal processing, and the subtraction processing of the high base number counter of step 028IWS70A and step 028IWS70B is not performed. Then, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

If it is not a 6R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it is a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 028IWS2211), and sets the special figure time reduction flag. To the KT state (step 028IWS2212). Further, the CPU 103 sets “50” in the high base number counter (step 028IWS2213). Then, the process proceeds to step 028IWS2214. Therefore, in the case of a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot, it is controlled to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step 028IWS2214).

(Small hit end processing)
FIG. 9-21 is a flowchart showing a small hit end process (step S128) in the accessory control process process. In the small hit end process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit end display timer is set (step 028IWS2300), and if the small hit end display timer is set, proceeds to step 028IWS2302. When the small hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 displays on the small hit end display timer corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is performed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time). A value corresponding to the time is set (step 028IWS2301), and the process ends.

In step 028IWS2302, the value of the small hit end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 028IWS2302). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 028IWS2303). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the small hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step 028IWS2303), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set (step 028IWS2304). If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the right-handed display 26 is lit (step 028IWS2305). If the right-handed display 26 is lit, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 028IWS2306), and also transmits a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed (step 028IWS2307).

In this example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the non-KT state, the right-handed indicator 26 starts lighting at the start of the small hit game (steps 028IWS2023B to S2025B). (See), the processing of steps 028IWS2304 to S2307 is executed, so that the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on at the end of the small hit game.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step 028IWS2308).

(Transition of game state)
Here, the transition of the gaming state in the feature unit 028IW will be described. FIG. 9-22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how to transition the gaming state in the feature unit 028IW. First, in this feature unit 028IW, in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the player performs a game ball launch operation (left-handed) aiming at the left side of the game area. Therefore, in the normal state, the starting prize is mainly generated in the first starting winning opening, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in a low probability / low base state, a 10R probability variable big hit, a 6R probability variable big hit, or a 6R normal big hit mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 9-22, when a 10R probability variation jackpot occurs in the low probability / low base state, it shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) after the end of the jackpot game. The high probability / low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 028IWS2204 to S2206). In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / low base state, it shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game, and until the next jackpot occurs. A high probability / high base state is maintained (see steps 028IWS2207-S2210). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs in a low probability / low base state, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game, and whether the next jackpot occurs. The low probability / high base state is maintained until the 50th variation display is completed (see steps 028IWS2211 to S2213).

After shifting to the KT state (high probability / high base state, low probability / high base state, high probability / low base state), in this feature unit 028IW, the player aims at the right side of the game area. And perform the firing operation (right-handed) of the game ball. Therefore, in the KT state, the start winning is mainly generated in the second starting winning opening, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in the KT state, a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, a 2R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot occurs mainly.

As shown in FIG. 9-22, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), a high probability / low base state occurs after the jackpot game ends. (High probability / second KT state) is entered, and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 028IWS2204 to S2206). In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), it shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The high probability / high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 028IWS2207-S2210). In this feature unit 028IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 6R probability variation jackpot is 50% in total (see FIG. 9-3), so that the probability is once high / high. In the base state, the high probability / high base state loops at a rate of 50%. In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the 50 fluctuation display is completed (see steps 028IWS2211 to S2213).

As shown in FIG. 9-22, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), a high probability / low base state occurs after the jackpot game ends. (High probability / second KT state) is entered, and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 028IWS2204 to S2206). In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), it shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The high probability / high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 028IWS2207-S2210). In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the 50 fluctuation display is completed (see steps 028IWS2211 to S2213). In this feature unit 028IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 2R normal jackpot is 35% (see FIGS. 9-3 (D) and (E)). Once the low probability / high base state is reached, the low probability / high base state loops at a rate of 35%. If a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot occurs and the probability / high base state is reached, and then 50 fluctuation displays are completed without the next jackpot occurring, FIG. 9-22 shows. As shown, it shifts to a low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) (see steps 028IWS69A to S73A, S69B to S73B).

As shown in FIG. 9-22, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), a high probability / low base state occurs after the jackpot game ends. (High probability / second KT state) is entered, and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 028IWS2204 to S2206). In this feature unit 028IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot is 15% (FIGS. 9-3 (D), (E). )), Once the high probability / low base state is reached, the high probability / low base state loops at a rate of 15%. In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), it shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The high probability / high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 028IWS2207-S2210). In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the 50 fluctuation display is completed (see steps 028IWS2211 to S2213).

In addition, in FIG. 9-22, the case where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is described, but the variation of the second special symbol is performed at a low rate. It is possible that the display will be performed. In this case, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 9-22, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the 50-time fluctuation display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 9-22, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the 50-time fluctuation display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 9-22, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the 50-time fluctuation display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

(Main processing of production control)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 9-23 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the effect control main process in the feature unit 028IW. In FIG. 9-23, the processing of steps 028IWS701 to S706 is the same as the processing of steps S71 to S76 shown in FIG.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the system small symbol process process (step 028IWS707). In this example, by executing the system small symbol process process of step 028IWS707, the image display device 5 synchronizes with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in addition to the variable display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the system small symbols on the left, middle, and right is executed.

In this example, in the second KT state (during small hit RUSH), the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed with low transmittance (except when the stop symbol is confirmed and displayed). By executing step 028IWS707, the variation display of the system small symbol is executed with high transparency even in the second KT state, and it is easy to visually recognize.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the second KT middle prize ball number display process for updating the prize ball number display displayed on the image display device 5 during the second KT state (step 028IWS708).

The process of step 028IWS709 is the same as the process of step S77 shown in FIG.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. 9-24 to 9-27 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 028IWS611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 028IWS612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 028IWS613). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 028IWS614), the effect control CPU 0120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step). 028IWS615).

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step 028IWS616), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 028IWS617). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 028IWS618).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step 028IWS619), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result specification command in the display result specification command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 028IWS620). ).

If the received effect control command is one of the symbol confirmation command (1st symbol confirmation command, 2nd symbol confirmation command, 1st forced symbol confirmation command, 2nd forced symbol confirmation command) (step 028IWS621) ), The effect control CPU 120 sets the confirmation command reception flag corresponding to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 028IWS622). For example, when the first symbol confirmation command is received, the first confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second symbol confirmation command is received, the second confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first forced confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the second forced confirmation command reception flag is set.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 028IWS623), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start displaying the right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 028IWS624). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 028IWS625).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 028IWS626), the effect control CPU 120 controls to end the display of the right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 028IWS627). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 028IWS628).

In this example, by executing the processes of steps 028IWS624 and S627, a right-handed display is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the jackpot game.

In addition, for example, by changing the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-handed display displayed during the big hit game, the set value suggestion effect suggesting the current set value may be executed. For example, when the right-handed display is started in step 028IWS624, the right-handed display of the white display color is normally started, but when the execution of the set value suggestion effect is decided, the set value "1" is set. If is, the right-handed display of the blue display color is started at a relatively high rate, and if the setting value is "2", the right-handed display of the green display color is started at a relatively high rate. , When the setting value is "3", the right-handed display of the yellow display color is started at a relatively high rate, and when the setting value is "4", the right of the orange display color is relatively high. When the setting value is "5", the right-handed display of the red display color is started at a relatively high rate, and when the setting value is "6", the right-handed display is started at a relatively high rate. Right-handed display of the rainbow-colored display color may be started.

Further, for example, the right-handed display is configured to be continuously executed even during the KT state after the jackpot game ends, and the right-handed display display mode (for example, display color) is changed and set at the timing of the jackpot game end. It may be configured to perform a value suggestion effect.

Further, for example, when the fluctuation display of 50 times is finished in the low probability / first KT state and the state shifts to the normal state (low probability / low base state), the left-handed display is configured to start, and the left-handed display is started. The display mode (for example, the display color) of the display may be changed to execute the set value suggestion effect. When the control of the game state is switched in some form in this way, the set value suggestion effect may be configured to be executable.

Further, not only when the setting value itself is suggested, for example, as a setting suggestion, a setting suggestion effect suggesting whether or not the setting has been changed may be executed. As described above, the setting suggestion effect is a concept including both an effect suggesting the set value itself and an effect suggesting the presence or absence of the setting change.

In addition, as a setting suggestion effect, "456 OVER" or "1666" or "1456" or "1456" or "1456" or "1656" or "1666" or "1666" is used as the setting suggestion effect. An emphasis effect such as "555 OVER" may be executed, and an effect suggesting that the set value is "4", "5", or "6" may be executed. In this way, an emphasis effect that is executed at a timing different from the emphasis effect that is executed at the timing when the prize ball number display becomes a regular value such as "5000 OVER" is configured to be executed as a setting suggestion effect. May be good. Further, the setting suggestion effect executed based on the display of the number of prize balls may be configured to be executable in both the second KT state (during the small hit RUSH) and during the big hit game.

Further, when the setting suggestion effect is configured to be executable, specifically, the effect control CPU 120 is currently set based on the setting value command (see step 028IWS615) received from the game control microcomputer 100. Specify the setting value. Further, the effect control CPU 120 prepares a setting suggestion effect determination table for determining the setting suggestion effect for each set value, and selects a setting suggestion effect determination table according to the set value specified from the set value command. .. Then, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to perform a lottery process based on random numbers using the selected setting suggestion effect determination table, and determine the presence / absence and type of the setting suggestion effect.

If the received effect control command is a small hit start designation command (step 028IWS629), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit start designation command reception flag (step 028IWS630).

If the received effect control command is a small hit end designation command (step 028IWS631), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit end designation command reception flag (step 028IWS632).

If the received effect control command is a display command during the opening of the big winning opening (step 028IWS633), the effect control CPU 120 specifies that the large winning opening is open (the round period during the big hit game). Set the flag during opening of the big winning opening (step 028IWS634).

If the received effect control command is a display command after opening the large winning opening (step 028IWS635), the effect control CPU 120 sets a flag after opening the large winning opening that specifies that it is an interval period after opening the large winning opening. (Step 028IWS636).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed lighting start designation command (step 028IWS637), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start lighting the right-handed lighting notification LED 37 (step 028IWS638).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed lighting end designation command (step 028IWS639), the effect control CPU 120 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed lighting notification LED 37 (step 028IWS640).

If the received effect control command is a low accuracy / non-KT background designation command (step 028IWS641), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image according to the low probability / non-KT state (for example, Control to display the image (blue background image) (step 028IWS642). If the effect control CPU 120 is set, the effect control CPU 120 resets the first KT state flag indicating that it is in the first KT state (step 028IWS643). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 is a prize for counting the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winning the big prize opening and the special winning opening during the big hit game and the high probability / second KT state. If the ball count counter is set, the value of the prize ball counter is reset (cleared to 0) (step 028IWS644).

In this example, the value of the prize ball counter is cumulative when a game ball wins in the big prize opening during a big hit game or when a game ball wins in a special winning opening during a high probability / second KT state. Although it is updated (see steps 028IWS660 and S663), 50 times after the game state becomes a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) by executing the process of step 028IWS644. When the fluctuation display is finished and the probability / low base state is reached, the value of the prize ball counter is cleared to 0.

Next, if the OVER display flag indicating that the 5000 OVER display (display indicating that the number of prize balls has reached 5000), which will be described later, has been displayed is set, the effect control CPU 120 has already displayed the OVER. Reset the flag (step 028IWS645). Further, if the prize ball number display is displayed on the image display device 5, the effect CPU CPU 120 controls to erase the prize ball number display (step 028IWS646).

If the received effect control command is a low accuracy / first KT background designation command (step 028IWS647), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image according to the low probability / first KT state (for example, Control to display the image (green background image) (step 028IWS648). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the first KT state flag (step 028IWS649), and if set, the high probability state flag indicating that the state is in the high probability state and the second KT state indicating that the state is in the second KT state. Reset the 2KT status flag (step 028IWS650).

If the received effect control command is a high-accuracy / first KT background designation command (step 028IWS651), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image according to the high probability / first KT state (for example, Control to display the image (yellow background image) (step 028IWS652). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the first KT state flag (step 028IWS653), and resets the second KT state flag if set (step 028IWS654).

If the received effect control command is a high-accuracy / second KT background designation command (step 028IWS655), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image according to the high probability / second KT state (for example,). The display is controlled by the red background image) (step 028IWS656). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the second KT state flag (step 028IWS657), and resets the first KT state flag if set (step 028IWS658).

If the received effect control command is a large prize opening prize designation command (step 028IWS659), the effect control CPU 120 adds 15 to the value of the prize ball counter (step 028IWS660). Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates the prize ball number display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the prize ball number counter after the addition (step 028IWS661). The prize ball number display is a display of the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winning the big prize opening and the special winning opening during the big hit game and the high probability / second KT state.

By executing the processes of steps 028IWS659 to S661, in this example, the value of the prize ball counter and the prize ball number display are updated based on the fact that the prize is won in the big prize opening during the big hit game.

If the received effect control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step 028IWS662), the effect control CPU 120 adds 10 to the value of the prize ball counter (step 028IWS663). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 028IWS664). If the second KT state flag is not set (N in step 028IWS664), that is, if it is not in the second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the image based on the value of the prize ball counter after addition. The display of the number of prize balls displayed is updated (step 028IWS665).

By executing the process of steps 028IWS662 to S665, in this example, when a small hit occurs when the player is not in the second KT state and a prize is won in the special winning opening, the value of the updated prize ball counter is used. The prize ball number display is updated immediately.

On the other hand, if the second KT state flag is set (Y in step 028IWS664), that is, during the second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 counts the number of winnings to the special winning opening generated during the second KT state. The value of the special winning number counter for this is added by 1 (step 028IWS666).

By executing the process of step 028IWS666, in this example, when a small hit occurs when the player is not in the second KT state and a prize is won in the special prize opening, the value of the prize ball counter and the value of the special prize counter. Is only updated, the prize ball number display is not updated immediately. In the second KT state, by executing the second KT middle prize ball number display process (step 028IWS708), as will be described later, after the small hit game is completed, a predetermined time per prize (that is, 10 prize balls) Control is performed to update the prize ball number display over (5 seconds in this example).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit game is in progress (step 028IWS667). Whether or not the small hit game is in progress indicates, for example, that the value of the effect control process flag used in the effect control process process indicates the small hit medium effect process (step S174) or the small hit end effect process (step S175). It can be determined by confirming whether or not it is a value. During the small hit game, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the “+10” display (step 028IWS668).

In this example, when step 028IWS668 is executed and the display of "+10" is started, the display of "+10" is continued until the small hit game is finished, and when the small hit game is finished, "+10" is displayed. The "+10" display is erased (see step 028IWS958).

Further, in this example, a plurality of prizes may be generated in the special winning opening during the small hit game, but when the "+10" display is already displayed during the small hit game, a further special winning opening is further displayed. If a prize is awarded, step 028IWS668 is executed and a new "+10" display is additionally displayed. Therefore, for example, when the special winning opening is awarded twice during the small hit game, two "+10" displays are displayed, and when the special winning opening is awarded three times during the small hit game. Is displayed with three "+10" displays. Then, when the small hit game is finished, all the "+10" displays are erased (see step 028IWS958).

Further, in this example, by executing the processes of steps 028IWS664, S667, and S668, the display of "+10" is displayed only during the small hit game in the second KT state. I can't be limited. For example, even when the player is not in the second KT state, a “+10” display may be displayed if a prize is won in the special winning opening during the small hit game.

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 executes a process of storing the received effect control command or setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 028IWS669). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 028IWS611.

(Variable display start waiting process)
FIG. 9-28 is a flowchart showing the variable display start waiting process (step S170). In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command has been received (step 028IWS811). Whether or not the variation pattern command is received is determined by, for example, setting a variation pattern command reception flag indicating that the variation pattern command has been received when the variation pattern command is received in the command analysis process (step S75). In step 028IWS811, it may be confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set.

If the variation pattern command is received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 028IWS812). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the non-KT state), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 executes the variation display of the first special symbol. Is confirmed (step 028IWS813). Whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the first variation patterns # 01 to # 09. It can be determined by confirming whether or not. Unless it is the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol (that is, the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol), the process is terminated as it is. When executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 028IWS815).

If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the case of executing the variation display of the second special symbol. (Step 028IWS814). Whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the second variation patterns # 01 to # 35. It can be determined by confirming whether or not. Unless the variation display of the second special symbol is executed (that is, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed), the process is terminated as it is. When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 028IWS815).

By executing the process of steps 028IWS812 to S815, in the feature unit 028IW, in the non-KT state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the first special symbol. When it is executed and in the KT state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. In other words, even if the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is in the KT state, or even if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, it is in the non-KT state. , The variable display of the decorative pattern is not executed.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 9-29 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step 028IWS921). Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol according to the variation pattern command read in step 028IWS921 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (step 028IWS922). That is, by executing the process of step 028IWS922 by the effect control CPU 120, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the decorative symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. The effect control CPU 120 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step 028IWS922, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. ..

In 028IWS922, for example, when the received display result specification command indicates a probability variation jackpot (in this example, a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, a 2R probability variation jackpot), the effect control CPU 120 has three symbols as stop symbols. Determines the combination of decorative symbols aligned with the same probability variation symbol (for example, odd symbol). Further, for example, when the received display result specification command indicates a normal jackpot (in this example, a 6R normal jackpot, a 2R normal jackpot), the effect control CPU 120 has three non-probability variation symbols as stop symbols. (For example, even-numbered symbols) are used to determine the combination of decorative symbols. Further, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a small hit, the small hit symbol (for example, a combination of the symbols of "135") is determined as the stop symbol. If the received display result specification command indicates an error, a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, if a reach effect is involved, the combination of decorative symbols with the two left and right symbols aligned is determined.

For example, the effect control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other to generate a stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the OVER displayed flag is set (step 028IWS927). If the OVER display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter is 5000 or more (step 028IWS928). If the value of the prize ball counter is 5000 or more, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display a 5000 OVER display indicating that the number of prize balls has reached 5000 (step 028IWS929). ). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the OVER displayed flag (step 028IWS930).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 028IWS931). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, during the second KT state), the effect control CPU 120 sets the variation pattern of the decorative symbol to be used based on the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command. A process table for variable display of the corresponding low-transparency decorative pattern is selected (step 028IWS932). On the other hand, if the second KT state flag is not set (that is, unless it is in the second KT state), the effect control CPU 120 changes the decorative symbol to be used based on the change pattern indicated by the received change pattern command. A process table for variable display of a decorative pattern having normal transparency according to a pattern is selected (step 028IWS933).

In this example, by executing the processing of steps 028IWS931 to S933, the variation display of the decorative symbol is executed with normal transparency in a state other than the second KT state, while the second KT state is in progress. In this case, the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed with low transparency.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process timer setting value of the process data 1 in the process table selected in step 028IWS933 to the process timer and starts the process timer (step 028IWS934). Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display device 5, various lamps, speakers 8L, 8R) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Is executed (step 028IWS935). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a control signal (display control execution data) to the VDP in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time in the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer and starts the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer (step 028IWS936).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process (step S172) during variable display (step 028IWS937).

(Variable display production processing)
FIG. 9-30 is a flowchart showing the variable display during effect processing (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 028IWS8101) and 1 subtracts the value of the decorative symbol variation time timer (step 028IWS8102). When the process timer times out (step 028IWS8103), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 028IWS8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step 028IWS8105).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 028IWS8106). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the non-KT state), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the first symbol confirmation designation command (for example, the first (1 Whether or not the confirmation command reception flag is set) is confirmed (step 028IWS8107). If the first symbol confirmation designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step 028IWS8110.

If the first symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, the effect control CPU 120 has received the first forced symbol confirmation designation command (for example, whether the first forced confirmation command reception flag has been set). Is confirmed (step 028IWS8108). If the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 028IWS921 of the variable display start setting process with an outlier symbol (step 028IWS8109). Then, the process proceeds to step 028IWS8110.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to erase the 5000 OVER display if it is displayed (step 028IWS8110). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 028IWS8111).

If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set in step 028IWS8106 (that is, if it is in the KT state), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the second symbol confirmation designation command (for example, the first 2 Confirm whether or not the confirmation command reception flag is set) (step 028IWS8112). If the second symbol confirmation designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step 028IWS8115.

If the second symbol confirmation command has not been received, the effect control CPU 120 has received the second forced symbol confirmation command (for example, whether the second forced confirmation command reception flag has been set). Is confirmed (step 028IWS8113). If the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 028IWS921 of the variable display start setting process with an outlier symbol (step 028IWS8114). Then, the process proceeds to step 028IWS8115.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to erase the 5000 OVER display if it is displayed (step 028IWS8115). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 028IWS8116).

If neither the first forced symbol confirmation command nor the second forced symbol confirmation command is received (N in steps 028IWS8108 and S8113), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the reach generation timing has been reached (step). 028IWS8117). Whether or not the reach generation timing is reached can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the decorative symbol variation time timer set in step 028IWS936 of the variable display start setting process. If the reach generation timing is reached, the effect control CPU 120 controls to change the prize ball number display to the low transmittance display if the prize ball number display is displayed on the image display device 5 (step 028IWS8118). ).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the decorative symbol variation time timer has timed out (step 028IWS8119). If the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer has timed out, the effect control CPU 120 switches to the process data for the standby effect (step 028IWS8120). Then, the effect control CPU 120 restarts the process timer (step 028IWS8121).

In this example, as described above, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit, and the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a miss, a small hit, or a probability variation big hit, is being executed. In the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. In addition, when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol, which is a miss, a small hit, or a probability variation big hit, is being executed, during the small hit game. , The update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. The fact that the decorative symbol variation time timer timed out in step 028IWS8119 without receiving any of the symbol confirmation designation commands means that the update of the first variation time timer or the second variation time timer is interrupted in this way, and the first This is the case where the variable display of the special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed. In this case, in this example, the processing of steps 028IWS8120 and S8121 is executed to switch to the standby effect, and then the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is restarted, and finally one special The standby effect is continued until the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol is completed. The "standby effect" is, for example, an effect in which the image display device 5 puts the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right into a temporary stop state in a state of shaking or slightly changing.

For example, in the image display device 5, when the fluctuation display of the system small symbol or the fourth symbol is also executed, the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the first special When the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed, the variable display of these system small symbols and the fourth special symbol is also continuously executed. Then, when the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is restarted and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finally stopped and displayed, these system small symbols and the fourth symbol are displayed. The fluctuation display is also stopped.

(Waiting processing per special figure)
9-31 and 9-32 are flowcharts showing a special figure hit waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process process. In the special symbol hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set (step 028IWS9701). .. If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, the process proceeds to step 028IWS9706. In the feature unit 028IW, when the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step 028IWS9705. Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when the jackpot effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the jackpot symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the effect during the jackpot has not yet been executed. Therefore, the process of displaying the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 028IWS9703 is performed. The process proceeds to step 028IWS9706 without execution.

If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set. (Step 028IWS9702). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the process proceeds to step 028IWS9715. In the feature unit 028IW, when the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag 2 is set in step 028IWS9714. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when the small hit medium effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set means that the small hit symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the small hit medium effect has not yet been executed. Therefore, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 028IWS9703 is displayed. The process proceeds to step 028IWS9715 without executing the process.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 120 uses the stop symbol of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols that are being stopped and displayed at the image display device 5 with normal transparency. Control is performed to confirm and display the out-of-order symbol, the big hit symbol, and the small hit symbol (step 028IWS9703). When the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command or the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received and the process of replacing with the misaligned symbol is executed in steps 028IWS8109 and S8113, the effect control CPU 120 is deviated from the symbol in step 028IWS9703. Is controlled to be confirmed and displayed.

In this example, the variation display of the decorative symbol is executed with low transmittance when in the second KT state, but by executing the process of step 028IWS9703, even in the second KT state, the variation display is executed. When the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed with normal transparency. Then, when the next variation display is started, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started again with low transmittance (see step 028IWS933). Although the description is omitted in this example, if the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed during the second KT state, the decorative symbol is transparent again when the big hit game or the small hit game is started. The degree shall be returned to low transparency.

When the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 028IWS9703 (Y in step 028IWS9704), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 028IWS9705).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received (step 028IWS9706). When the jackpot start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 028IWS9707).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the prize ball number display if it is not displayed (step 028IWS9708).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the effect during the jackpot (step 028IWS9709). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 028IWS9710), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step 028IWS9711).

After that, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during the jackpot (step S176) (step 028IWS9712).

If the big hit symbol is not confirmed and displayed in the process of step 028IWS9703 (N in step 028IWS9704), and if the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 028IWS9703 (Y in step 028IWS9713), the effect control CPU 120 is stopped. The symbol display flag 2 is set (step 028IWS9714).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received (step 028IWS9715). When the small hit start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step 028IWS9716).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the small hit medium effect (step 028IWS9717). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 028IWS9718), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step 028IWS9719).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process (step S174) (step 028IWS9720).

When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is not displayed in the process of step 028IWS9703 (that is, when the missed symbol is displayed) (N in step 028IWS9704 and N in step 028IWS9713), the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 028IWS9721).

(Small hit end production processing)
9-33 is a flowchart showing the small hit end effect process (step S175) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step 028IWS951). The effect period measurement timer is set based on the completion of the opening control of the special winning opening in the small hit game in the small hit medium effect process (see step S174). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step 028IWS952).

When the effect period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step 028IWS952), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 028IWS953), and the effect device (image display device 5) according to the contents of the process data n. , Game effect lamp 9, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) is executed (step 028IWS954). For example, it indicates that the small hit is finished.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 028IWS955), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step 028IWS956). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step 028IWS957).

If the effect period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step 028IWS952), and if the image display device 5 displays "+10", the effect control CPU 120 displays all the displayed "+10" displays. Control to erase (step 028IWS958).

After that, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 028IWS959).

(2nd KT middle prize ball number display processing)
FIG. 9-34 is a flowchart showing the second KT middle prize ball number display process (step 028IWS708). In the second KT middle prize ball number display process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the prize ball number display updating flag indicating that the prize ball number display is being updated is set (step 028IWS501). ). If the prize ball number display updating flag is not set (N in step 028IWS501), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the special prize number counter is 0 (step 028IWS502). If the value of the special prize number counter is 0 (Y in step 028IWS502), the second KT middle prize ball number display process is terminated as it is.

If the value of the special winning number counter is not 0 (N in step 028IWS502), that is, if there are still unreflected prize balls in the special winning opening that occurred during the second KT state , The effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit game is in progress (step 028IWS503). Whether or not the small hit game is in progress indicates, for example, that the value of the effect control process flag used in the effect control process process indicates the small hit medium effect process (step S174) or the small hit end effect process (step S175). It can be determined by confirming whether or not it is a value. If the small hit game is in progress (Y in step 028IWS503), the second KT middle prize ball number display process is terminated as it is.

Unless the small hit game is in progress (N in step 028IWS503), the effect control CPU 120 increases the cumulative number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number display by 10 at a predetermined update speed in the image display device 5. Control to start the production (step 028IWS504). In this example, by executing the increase effect, the prize balls take a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) by "10" corresponding to the number of prize balls corresponding to one prize in the special prize opening. An effect display is performed in which the cumulative number of prize balls indicated by the number display increases. In this example, when the first increase effect is started after the small hit game is completed, the number of prize balls displayed on the image display device 5 is enlarged from the normal display size, and the prize balls are displayed in the enlarged display size. The number display is updated. Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the prize ball number display updating flag (step 028IWS505).

If the flag for updating the number of prize balls is set (Y in step 028IWS501), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the increase effect has been completed (step 028IWS506). Whether or not the increase effect is finished is determined by, for example, whether or not the control signal for starting the increase effect is output to the VDP in step 028IWS504 and then the control signal indicating the end of the increase effect is input from the VDP. Can be determined by checking.

If the increase effect is completed, the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined weight process (step 028IWS507). In this example, by executing step 028IWS507, the next increase effect can be executed after at least a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed after the increase effect is completed. ..

Next, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the special winning number counter (step 028IWS508), and confirms whether or not the value of the special winning number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 028IWS509). If the value of the special winning number counter is not 0 (N in step 028IWS509), that is, if there are still unreflected prize balls in the special winning opening that occurred during the second KT state. The effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start an increase effect for increasing the cumulative number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number display by 10 at a predetermined update speed (step 028IWS510). That is, since some of the prizes to the special prize opening generated during the second KT state are not yet reflected in the prize ball number display, the next increase effect is started.

On the other hand, if the value of the special prize number counter is 0 (Y in step 028IWS509), that is, if all the prizes to the special prize opening generated during the second KT state are reflected in the prize ball number display, it is for effect control. The CPU 120 resets the prize ball number display updating flag (step 028IWS511), and ends the second KT middle prize ball number display process. When all the prizes in the special winning opening have been reflected in the prize ball number display and the final increase effect is completed, the display size of the prize ball number display displayed on the image display device 5 is returned to the normal size.

(Display layer)
9-35 is an explanatory diagram showing a setting example of a display layer of an image displayed on the image display device 5. As shown in FIGS. 9-35, in this example, five layers 1 to 5 are set as display layers. As shown in FIGS. 9-35, in this example, an error image is displayed on the layer 1, a system small symbol is displayed on the layer 2, and various notice effect images and 5000 OVER display are displayed on the layer 3. A decorative pattern is displayed on the layer 4, and a prize ball number display is displayed on the layer 5.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-35, priorities are set for each of layers 1 to 5, the priority of layer 1 is the highest at "1", and the priority of layer 5 is "5". It is the lowest. Therefore, in this example, the error image is displayed with the highest priority, the system small symbol is displayed with priority, then various notice effect images and the 5000 OVER display are displayed with priority, and then. The decorative pattern is displayed with priority, and the number of prize balls is displayed with the lowest priority.

(Display example of prize ball number display)
Next, a display mode when updating the prize ball number display will be described. 9-36 to 9-38 are explanatory views for explaining a display mode when updating the prize ball number display. In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-36 to 9-38, it is assumed that the gaming state is the second KT state (small hit RUSH). Further, in FIGS. 9-36 to 9-38, the display screens transition in the order of (A), (B), (C), ....

When in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-36 (A), the image display device 5 displays the variable display of the decorative symbol 028IW001 with low transmittance, and the prize ball number display 028IW002 is displayed. It is displayed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-36 (A), the display area partially overlaps between the variable display of the decorative symbol 028IW001 and the prize ball number display 028IW002. In this example, the variation display of the decorative symbol 028IW001 is displayed on the display layer having a higher priority than the prize ball number display 028IW002 (see FIG. 9-35), but the variation of the decorative symbol 028IW001 is displayed in the second KT state. Since the display is displayed with low transparency (see step 028IWS932), the prize ball number display 028IW002 has higher visibility.

Next, at the timing of the fluctuation stop, as shown in FIG. 9-36 (B), the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 028IW001 is confirmed and displayed on the image display device 5. In the example shown in FIG. 9-36 (B), the case where the small hit symbol (in this example, the combination of the symbols of "135") is confirmed and displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 028IW001 is shown. In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-36 (B), when the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 028IW001 is confirmed and displayed, the transparency of the decorative symbol 028IW001 is returned to the normal transparency (see step 028IWS9703). The visibility of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 028IW001 is improved. In this example, since the variable display of the decorative symbol 028IW001 is displayed on the display layer having a higher priority than the prize ball number display 028IW002 (see FIG. 9-35), as shown in FIG. 9-36 (B). , The overlapping portion of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 028IW001 and the prize ball number display 028IW002 is hidden by the decorative symbol 028IW001 having a high priority, and the display of the prize ball number display 028IW002 becomes difficult to see.

As shown in FIGS. 9-36 (A) and 9-36 (B), in this example, the variable display of the system small symbol 028IW010 is visually recognized at the upper left end of the display screen of the screen display device 5 regardless of the gaming state. It is displayed as possible, and when it is time to stop the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the system small symbol 028IW010 is visibly confirmed and displayed (see step 028IWS707). Therefore, in this example, even when the decorative symbol 028IW001 is displayed with low transmittance and is difficult to see during the second KT state, the progress of the game can be recognized by looking at the system small symbol 028IW010.

Next, when the small hit game is started, as shown in FIG. 9-36 (C), the transparency of the decorative symbol 028IW001 is returned to the low transparency again, and the prize ball number display 028IW002 is in a state of higher visibility. Become. Further, when a prize is generated in the special winning opening during the small hit game, as shown in FIG. 9-36 (C), the image display device 5 displays "+10" display 028IW003 for each winning in the special winning opening. (See step 028IWS668). As shown in FIG. 9-36 (C), in this example, when a prize is entered in the special winning opening during the small hit game, the “+10” display 028IW003 is immediately displayed. The prize ball number display 028IW002 is not updated until the end of.

Then, when the small hit game is completed, as shown in FIG. 9-36 (D), all the “+10” display 028IW003 displayed on the image display device 5 are erased (see step 028IWS958). Further, as shown in FIG. 9-36 (D), the prize ball number display is enlarged display 028IW004, and the update display of the prize ball number display 028IW004 expanded at a predetermined update speed is started (see step 028IWS504). In this example, in order to increase and display "10" corresponding to the number of prize balls corresponding to one winning in the special winning opening, the number of prize balls is displayed 028IW004 over a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example). Is updated and displayed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (E), even if the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 028IW001 (the off symbol in this example) is confirmed and displayed, even before the lapse of a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example). For example, the prize ball number display 028IW004 is continuously updated, and as shown in FIG. 9-37 (F), when a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) elapses, the prize ball number display 028IW004 is shown. It is displayed with the cumulative number of numbers increased by "10". In this example, when the update for one prize is completed, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (F), the cumulative number of prize balls is once increased by "10" and stopped and displayed (see step 028IWS507). ), As shown in FIG. 9-37 (G), the next update of the prize ball number display 028IW004 is started after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed (see step 028IWS510).

Then, similarly, as shown in FIGS. 9-37 (H), 9-38 (I), and 9-38 (J), the stop symbol (in this example, the outlier symbol) of the decorative symbol 028IW001 is determined. Even if it is displayed or the next small hit occurs, the update of the prize ball number display 028IW004 is continued before the lapse of the predetermined time (5 seconds in this example), and it is shown in FIG. 9-38 (K). As shown, when a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) has elapsed, the cumulative number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number display 028IW004 is displayed in a state of being increased by "10". Although the description is omitted in FIG. 9-38 (K), the number of prize balls displayed 028IW004 is updated for the last prize (the second prize in this example) that occurred during the previous small hit game. When finished, the display size of the prize ball number display shall once return to the normal size.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-38 (K), when a prize is generated in the special winning opening even during a new small hit game, as shown in FIG. 9-38 (K), in the image display device 5, A “+10” display 028IW003 is displayed for each winning in the special winning opening (see step 028IWS668). As shown in FIG. 9-38 (K), even when a prize is entered in the special winning opening during a new small hit game, the “+10” display 028IW003 is immediately displayed. The prize ball number display 028IW002 is not updated until the game is completed.

Then, when the new small hit game is completed, as shown in FIG. 9-38 (L), all the "+10" display 028IW003 displayed on the image display device 5 are erased (see step 028IWS958). , The prize ball number display is enlarged and displayed 028IW004 again, and the update display of the prize ball number display 028IW004 expanded at a predetermined update speed is started (see step 028IWS504).

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-36 to 9-38, the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right is used regardless of whether the small hit symbol is confirmed or the missed symbol is confirmed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. Is shown in the case where is displayed in a line in the horizontal direction, but is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed, the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are arranged so as to be confirmed in a row in the horizontal direction, and when the out-of-order symbol is confirmed and displayed. May be configured so that the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are displayed with a slight vertical shift.

(Update timing of prize ball number display)
Next, the update timing when updating the prize ball number display will be described. FIG. 9-39 is a timing chart showing an example of the update timing when updating the prize ball number display. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-39, the second fluctuation pattern # 30 and the second fluctuation pattern # 33 are likely to be selected when the fluctuation display that causes a deviation or a small hit is executed during the second KT state. In the image display device 5, the variation display of the decorative symbol having a variation time of 3 seconds is likely to be executed.

In the example shown in FIGS. 9-39, a case where a small hit occurs in the variation display of the first decorative symbol and the game shifts to the small hit game is shown. In this example, when the small hit game is executed, after a fanfare period of 0.5 seconds, the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to be in an open state for 1.5 seconds, and then for 0.5 seconds. An ending period is provided, and as shown in FIGS. 9-39, the total period of the small hit game is 2.5 seconds. In the example shown in FIGS. 9-39, a case where two winnings to the special winning opening occur during the first small hit game is shown. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 9-39, each time a prize is generated, the display of “+10” is immediately started during the small hit game (see step 028IWS668). On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9-39, the prize ball number display is not updated until the small hit game is completed.

Then, when the first small hit game is completed, as shown in FIG. 9-39, all the "+10" displays displayed on the image display device 5 are erased (see step 028IWS958). Further, when the first small hit game is completed, as shown in FIG. 9-39, the number of prize balls displayed corresponding to the winning to the special winning opening generated during the first small hit game is updated. It is started (see step 028IWS504). In this case, as shown in FIGS. 9-39, the prize ball number display is updated over 5 seconds for each prize in the special prize opening.

Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 9-39, when a small hit occurs again in the variable display of the third decorative symbol after the end of the first small hit game, and the game shifts to the second small hit game. It is shown. Then, the case where the update of the prize ball number display for all the winnings generated during the first small hit game ends during the second small hit game is shown.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-39, even when a prize is entered in the special winning opening during the second small hit game, "+10" is displayed during the second small hit game. (See step 028IWS668) The "+10" display continues until the second small hit game is completed (see step 028IWS958). On the other hand, for winning a prize in the special winning opening that occurred during the second small hit game, as shown in FIG. 9-39, the number of prize balls until the end of the second small hit game. The display is not updated. Then, as shown in FIGS. 9-39, when the second small hit game is completed, the number of prize balls displayed corresponding to the winning to the special winning opening generated during the second small hit game is updated. It is started (see step 028IWS504).

In the example shown in FIGS. 9-39, the update of the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning of the special winning opening generated during the first small hit game ends in the middle of the second small hit game. Although the case is shown, for example, when more prize balls are generated during the first small hit game, or when the next small hit is generated immediately after the end of the first small hit game. In some cases, the update of the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning of the special winning opening generated during the first small hit game may not be completed by the end of the second small hit game. FIG. 9-40 is a timing chart showing another example of the update timing when updating the prize ball number display.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-40, three prizes are generated in the special winning opening in the first small hit game, and the first small hit game is in progress until the second small hit game is completed. It is shown that the update of the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning to the special winning opening that occurred in is not completed. In the example shown in FIG. 9-40, two prizes are generated in the special winning opening even in the second small hit game, but even after the second small hit game is completed, 1 is still generated. Since the number of prize balls displayed has been updated corresponding to the winning of the special winning opening that occurred during the second small hit game, the special winning opening that occurred during the second small hit game has been updated. It is not possible to start updating the prize ball number display corresponding to the winning. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-40, after the second small hit game is completed, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning to the special winning opening generated during the first small hit game. After the update of the display is completed, the update of the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning to the special winning opening generated during the second small hit game is started.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-39 and 9-40, the "+10" display displayed during the small hit game is all erased at the end of the small hit game. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, all "+10" displays may be configured to be uniformly displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), and may be configured to be displayed over the next variable display after the end of the small hit game.

(Display example of 5000OVER display)
Next, the display mode of the 5000 OVER display will be described. FIG. 9-41 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display mode of the 5000 OVER display. In addition, in FIG. 9-41, the display screen changes in the order of (A), (B), (C) .... In the example shown in FIG. 9-41 (A), the update of one prize in the special winning opening is completed during the second KT state, and the cumulative number of prize balls shown in the prize ball number display 028IW004 is "4995". The state of becoming is shown. Then, since there is a prize that has not yet been reflected in the prize ball number display 028IW004, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (B), the update of the prize ball number display 028IW004 for the next prize is started. In this case, the value of the prize ball counter is already 5000 or more, only not being reflected in the prize ball number display 028IW004.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (C), the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 028IW001 (in this example, the outlier symbol) is confirmed and displayed, and as shown in FIG. 9-41 (D), a new decorative symbol 028IW001 is displayed. Fluctuation display of is started. In this case, the cumulative number of prize balls shown in the prize ball number display 028IW004 has not yet reached 5000, but based on the fact that the value of the prize ball counter has already exceeded 5000 when the variable display is started. (See step 028IWS928), as shown in FIG. 9-41 (D), the image display device 5 displays the 5000 OVER display 028IW005 (see step 028IWS929).

(Display example in which the prize ball number display is displayed with low transmittance)
Next, a display mode when the prize ball number display is displayed with low transmittance will be described. FIG. 9-42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display mode when the prize ball number display is displayed with low transparency. In addition, in FIG. 9-42, the display screen changes in the order of (A), (B), (C) .... As shown in FIG. 9-42 (A), the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 028IW001 (in this example, the outlier symbol) is confirmed and displayed, and as shown in FIG. 9-42 (B), the variation of the new decorative symbol 028IW001. It is assumed that the display has started. Here, in this example, it is assumed that the second fluctuation patterns # 31, # 34, and # 35 including the battle effect are selected as the fluctuation patterns.

In this example, when the second fluctuation pattern # 31, # 34, # 35 is selected, the fluctuation display having a long fluctuation time of 2 minutes is executed (see FIG. 9-6 (I)), and the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is performed. After reaching the inside, a production that develops into a battle production is executed. Further, since the fluctuation time is as long as 2 minutes, in this example, the time is set so that the update of the prize ball number display is almost completed by the time when the reach is established.

As shown in FIG. 9-42 (C), the last update of the prize ball number display 028IW004 is completed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and after that, the reach is established after the prize ball number display returns to the normal display size. At the timing, as shown in FIG. 9-42 (D), the prize ball number display is switched to the low transmittance display 028IW006 (see steps 028IWS8117 and S8118).

(Example when a delayed ball is detected)
In this example, when a prize is detected in the special winning opening during the small hit game, "+10" is displayed immediately, but when the prize is won immediately before the special variable winning ball device 17 is closed, the prize is displayed. At the timing when the winning game ball is detected by the second count switch 24, the small hit game may have already ended and the ball may be delayed. FIG. 9-43 is a timing chart showing an example of the display timing of “+10” display when a delayed ball is detected.

In the example shown in FIGS. 9-43, a case where three winnings to the special winning opening occur during the first small hit game is shown. In the example shown in FIGS. 9-43, the first and second prizes are displayed as "+10" based on the fact that they are detected by the second count switch 24 during the small hit game (see step 028IWS668). The "+10" display is continued until the small hit game is completed (see step 028IWS958). On the other hand, the third winning occurs immediately before the special variable winning ball device 17 is closed, and as shown in FIG. 43, when it is detected by the second count switch 24, the small hit game has already been completed ( That is, it is a delayed ball). In this case, since the small hit game is not already in progress when detected by the second count switch 24, the “+10” display is not displayed as shown in FIG. 9-43 (see N in step 028IWS667).

In addition, it is conceivable that the winning to the special winning opening generated during the small hit game is only one delayed ball, but in such a case, "+10" is displayed during the small hit game. Without this, only the update display of the prize ball number display is started after the delayed ball is detected after the small hit game is completed.

(Modification example 1)
In this feature unit 028IW, when the variable display that becomes a big hit is executed during the second KT state, the prize ball number display is temporarily deleted, and the number of prize balls acquired during the second KT state (small hit RUSH) It may be configured to execute the total prize ball number notification which notifies the total number. Hereinafter, a modification 1 for executing the total prize ball number notification will be described.

In the first modification, in addition to the prize ball counter, a second KT middle prize ball counter for counting the cumulative number of prize balls acquired only during the second KT state is provided, and a large prize opening prize designation command is provided. And the special winning opening winning designation command is received, and the second KT middle prize ball counter is also added. Then, the second KT middle prize ball number counter is reset based on the occurrence of a jackpot and a jackpot other than the 10R probability variation jackpot and the 2R probability variation jackpot (that is, a jackpot that does not shift to the second KT state).

FIG. 9-44 is a flowchart showing the variable display start waiting process (step S170) in the first modification. In the first modification, the processes of steps 028IWS921 and S922 are the same as those processes shown in FIGS. 9-29.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 028IWS923). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, during the second KT state), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation display started this time is a big hit (step 028IWS924). ). In addition. Whether or not it is a jackpot fluctuation can be determined, for example, by checking the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area. If the jackpot fluctuates, the effect control CPU 120 erases the prize ball number display displayed on the image display device 5 (step 028IWS925). In this case, the prize ball number display is deleted even while the prize ball number display is being updated.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the small hit RUSH end display that notifies the end of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) (step 028IWS926). That is, if a big hit occurs during the second KT state, the game state may change after the big hit game ends (although the second KT state may be reached again), and the second KT state may end. Therefore, control is performed to display the small hit RUSH end display and notify the end of the second KT state.

The processes after step 028IW927 are the same as those processes shown in FIGS. 9-29.

FIG. 9-45 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the first modification. The processing of steps 028IWS8101 to S8105 is the same as those processing shown in FIG. 9-30. Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit RUSH end display is being displayed (step 028IWS8131). If the small hit RUSH end display is not being displayed, the process proceeds to step 028IWS8135. If the small hit RUSH end display is being displayed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the display timing of the total prize ball number notification (step 028IWS8132). If it is not the display timing of the total prize ball number notification, the process proceeds to step 028IWS8135.

When the display timing of the total prize ball number notification is reached, the effect control CPU 120 controls to erase the small hit RUSH end display displayed on the image display device 5 (step 028IWS8133). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays a total prize ball number notification that notifies the total number of prize balls acquired during the second KT state (during the small hit RUSH) based on the value of the second KT middle prize ball number counter. Control to start (step 028IWS8134). Then, the process proceeds to step 028IWS8135.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the total prize ball number notification is being displayed (step 028IWS8135). If the total prize ball number notification is not being displayed, the process proceeds to step 028IWS8106. If the total prize ball number notification is being displayed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the reach generation timing has been reached (step 028IWS8136). If it is not the reach generation timing, the process proceeds to step 028IWS8106. When the reach generation timing is reached, the effect control CPU 120 controls to erase the total prize ball number notification displayed on the image display device 5 (step 028IWS8137).

The processes after step 028IWS8106 are the same as those processes shown in FIG. 9-30.

FIG. 9-46 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display mode of the total prize ball number notification in the first modification. In addition, in FIG. 9-46, the display screen changes in the order of (A), (B), (C) .... As shown in FIG. 9-46 (A), it is assumed that the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 028IW001 (in this example, the outlier symbol) is confirmed and displayed, and the jackpot fluctuation is started as the variation display of the new decorative symbol 028IW001. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-46 (B), the prize ball number display 028IW004 is erased in the image display device 5, and the display of the small hit RUSH end display is started (see step 028IWS926). In the example shown in FIG. 9-46 (B), a predetermined character image 028IW007 is displayed as the small hit RUSH end display, and a character display 028IW008 such as "small hit RUSH end!" Is displayed. ing.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-46 (A), the prize ball number display 028IW004 is in the middle of the update display, but in this example, when the jackpot fluctuation is started, the prize ball number display 028IW004 is being updated. Even so, the prize ball number display 028IW004 is deleted.

Next, at the start timing of the total prize ball number notification, as shown in FIG. 9-46 (C), the small hit RUSH end display is erased in the image display device 5, and the display of the total prize ball number notification is started. (See 028IWS8134). In the example shown in FIG. 9-46 (C), the total number of prize balls acquired during the most recent second KT state is 1885 (the value of the second KT middle prize ball counter is 1885), and the total prize is A case where a character display 028IW009 such as "RUSH TOTAL 1885PT" is displayed as a ball number notification is shown. After that, when the reach is established, as shown in FIG. 9-46 (D), the total prize ball number notification is deleted in the image display device 5 (see steps 028IWS8136 and S8137).

(Modification 2)
In this feature unit 028IW, in addition to the prize ball number display, the small hit RUSH prize ball number display indicating the total number of prize balls acquired during the second KT state (during the small hit RUSH) may be displayed. Good. Hereinafter, a modification 2 for displaying the small hit RUSH prize ball number display will be described.

In the second modification, as in the first modification, in addition to the prize ball counter, a second KT middle prize ball counter for counting the cumulative number of prize balls acquired only during the second KT state is provided. , The second KT middle prize ball count counter shall also be added based on the reception of the large prize opening prize designation command and the special winning opening prize designation command. Then, the second KT middle prize ball number counter is reset based on the occurrence of a jackpot and a jackpot other than the 10R probability variation jackpot and the 2R probability variation jackpot (that is, a jackpot that does not shift to the second KT state).

9-47 and 9-48 are explanatory views for explaining the display mode of the small hit RUSH prize ball number display in the second modification. In the example shown in FIG. 9-47 (A), two prizes are generated in the special winning opening during the small hit game, and the image display device 5 displays "+10" display 028IW003 for each winning in the special winning opening. (See step 028IWS668). Further, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (A), in the modification 2, in addition to the prize ball number display 028IW002, the number of prize balls acquired in the second KT state (during the small hit RUSH) in the image display device 5. The small hit RUSH prize ball number display 028IW011 indicating the total number of balls is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (A), when a prize is entered in the special winning opening during the small hit game, "+10" display 028IW003 is immediately displayed, but until the small hit game is completed. The prize ball number display 028IW002 and the small hit RUSH prize ball number display 028IW011 are not updated.

Then, when the small hit game is completed, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (B), all the “+10” display 028IW003 displayed on the image display device 5 are erased (see step 028IWS958). Further, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (B), the prize ball number display is enlarged and displayed 028IW004, and the updated display of the prize ball number display 028IW004 expanded at a predetermined update speed is started (see step 028IWS504). In the example shown in FIG. 9-47 (B), a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) is used to increase and display "10" corresponding to the number of prize balls corresponding to the first prize in the special prize opening. The prize ball number display 028IW004 is updated and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (B), in order to increase and display "20" corresponding to the number of prize balls for two prizes to the special winning opening generated during the small hit game, the small hit RUSH The update display of the prize ball number display 028IW011 is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (C), the small hit RUSH prize ball number display 028IW011 starts to be displayed from "0960 PT" to "0980 PT" corresponding to two prizes at once. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (C), the prize ball number display 028IW004 is stopped and displayed in a state where the cumulative number of prize balls is once increased by "10" in response to the first prize (C). (See step 028IWS507), as shown in FIG. 9-47 (D), the next update of the prize ball number display 028IW004 is started after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed (see step 028IWS510). .. Then, when the predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) elapses, as shown in FIG. 9-48 (E), the number of prize balls corresponding to the second prize is also reflected, and the number of prize balls is further accumulated. The stop display is displayed when the number is increased by "10" (see step 028IWS507).

In the second modification shown in FIGS. 9-47 and 9-48, a big hit occurs during the second KT state (small hit RUSH), and after the big hit game ends, the second KT state (small hit RUSH) is reached again. In this case, the small hit RUSH prize ball number display 028IW011 may be reset once, and in the next second KT state (small hit RUSH), it may be started from the state of "0000PT", or the previous second KT state (small hit RUSH). The small hit RUSH prize ball number display 028IW011 may be displayed in a state where the prize ball number acquired in is inherited.

(Modification 3)
As shown in FIG. 9-41, the feature unit 028IW shows a case where the 5000 OVER display is displayed based on the value of the prize ball counter value exceeding 5000 regardless of the prize ball number display 028IW004. , Not limited to such aspects. On the contrary, regardless of the value of the prize ball counter, the 5000 OVER display may be displayed based on the cumulative number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number display 028IW004 exceeds 5000. Hereinafter, a modification 3 for displaying the 5000 OVER display based on the cumulative number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number display 028IW004 exceeds 5000 will be described.

9-49 and 9-50 are explanatory views for explaining the display mode of the 5000 OVER display in the modified example 3. In FIGS. 9-49 and 9-50, the display screens change in the order of (A), (B), (C), and so on. In the third modification, the display modes shown in FIGS. 9-49 (A) to (C) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 9-41 (A) to (C).

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-49 (D), the variation display of the new decorative symbol 028IW001 is started. In this case, the value of the prize ball counter has already exceeded 5000, but the cumulative number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number display 028IW004 has not yet reached 5000. Therefore, in the modified example 3, the 5000 OVER display is not started as shown in FIG. 9-49 (D). After that, as shown in FIG. 9-50 (E), when the update of the prize ball number display 028IW004 is completed and the cumulative number of prize balls shown in the prize ball number display 028IW004 exceeds 5000, the image is displayed. The 5000 OVER display 028IW021 is displayed on the device 5.

As described above, according to the feature unit 028IW, an advantageous value (for example, a prize ball) can be given based on the occurrence of a specific event (for example, the occurrence of a prize in a special winning opening). Further, it is possible to display a predetermined display (for example, "+10" display 028IW003) corresponding to the advantageous value based on the occurrence of a specific event, and a total display corresponding to the total advantageous value (for example, prize ball number display 028IW002). 004) can be displayed. In addition, in the first period in which a specific event can occur (for example, the period during the small hit game), a predetermined display is displayed based on the occurrence of the specific event, and the second period (for example, the length is different from the first period). , The period after the end of the small hit game), the total display is updated based on the occurrence of a specific event. Also, the second period is longer than the first period (see FIGS. 9-39 and 9-40). Further, when a plurality of specific events occur, a predetermined display is displayed in a mode corresponding to the plurality of specific events in the first period (for example, FIGS. 9-36 (C), 9-38 (K), FIG. As shown in 9-39 and FIG. 9-40, "+10" display 028IW003 is displayed for each prize), and the total display is updated in response to a plurality of specific events in the second period (for example, FIG. 9-36). -As shown in FIG. 9-40, the prize ball number display 028IW004 is updated over a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) for each prize. Therefore, while emphasizing that a plurality of specific events have occurred in the first period, the total display is updated in the second period longer than the first period, so that the total display can also be emphasized. Therefore, it is possible to emphasize the total display while emphasizing that a plurality of specific events have occurred, and it is possible to improve the interest.

The "first period" is a period in which a specific event can occur, and specifically, a period in which a prize can occur in a specific winning opening such as during a small hit game. Further, the "second period" is a period in which the total display (for example, the display of the number of prize balls) can be updated, and specifically, is a period after the end of the small hit game. However, in this example, the next small hit may occur before the update of all prize ball number displays is completed, so the concept that the "second period" may include other "first period". Is.

Further, in this example, the case where the "first period" is during the small hit game period is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, a predetermined fixed period (for example, 3 seconds) from winning the first special winning opening during the small hit game period may be set as the “first period”. Further, for example, the period of the small hit game period excluding the fanfare period may be defined as the “first period”.

Further, in this example, as a predetermined display, when a "+10" display is displayed for each prize in the special winning opening during the small hit game (hence, if there are multiple prizes, a plurality of "+10" displays are displayed. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, if the first prize is generated during the small hit game, "+10" is displayed, if the second prize is generated, the display is updated to "+20", and if the third prize is generated, "+30" is displayed. It may be configured to update one predetermined display for each winning, such as updating the display. As such, various modes can be considered as a mode of "displaying a predetermined display in a mode corresponding to a plurality of specific events".

Further, in this example, the case where the "+10" display is displayed corresponding to the winning of the special winning opening only in the second KT state is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it is possible to display "+10" display in response to winning in the special winning opening even in the 1st KT state, or special winning even in the normal state (low probability / low base state). The "+10" display may be configured to be displayable in response to the winning of the mouth.

Further, in this example, the prize ball number display is updated over a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) only in the second KT state, and the prize ball number display is immediately updated in a state other than the second KT state. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the prize ball number display may be updated over a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) even during the first KT state.

Further, a configuration for displaying a predetermined display or a configuration for updating the total display shown in this example may be applied to the slot machine. When applied to slot machines, for example, the number of remaining games of ART is displayed during ART (assist replay time), and the number of additional games of ART is displayed as "+ 10G" during the special zone period after the interruption of ART. It may be configured so that the number of additions is added to the remaining number of games over a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) when the ART is restarted after the end of the addition special zone period.

Further, according to the present feature unit 028IW, the second period may further include the first period (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-40, a special case generated during the first small hit game. The update of the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning in the winning opening may not be completed by the end of the second small hit game). In addition, when a new specific event occurs in the first period of the second period, the total display is updated in response to the new specific event after the end of the first period in which the new specific event occurs. (For example, as shown in FIG. 9-40, after the second small hit game is completed, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning to the special winning opening generated during the first small hit game is displayed. After the update of is completed, the update of the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning to the special winning opening that occurred during the second small hit game will be started). Therefore, even if a new specific event occurs during the second period, the total display can be emphasized, and the interest can be improved.

Further, according to the feature unit 028IW, when a plurality of specific events occur, the total display is updated according to the number of times corresponding to the number of occurrences of the specific event (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-36 to 9-40). When the update for one prize is completed, the prize ball number display 028IW004 is temporarily stopped and displayed with the cumulative number of prize balls increased by "10", and a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed. After that, the update of the next prize ball number display 028IW004 will start). Therefore, the total display can be emphasized so that the number of occurrences of a specific event can be recognized.

In this example, when the update of the prize ball number display for one prize is completed, the prize ball number display corresponding to the next prize is updated after waiting for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the prize ball number display may be updated by collecting the prizes to the plurality of special prize openings that have occurred. In this case, for example, if two prizes are awarded to the special prize openings, the prize ball number display may be updated in response to the prizes to the two special prize openings at once. ..

Further, according to the feature unit 028IW, the first total display (for example, the prize ball number display 028IW002,004) and the second total display (for example, the small hit RUSH prize ball number display 028IW011 shown in FIGS. 9-47) are displayed. It can be displayed. In addition, when a plurality of specific events occur, the first total display is updated according to the number of times corresponding to the number of occurrences of the specific event (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-47, when the update for one prize is completed. , The prize ball number display 028IW004 is temporarily stopped and displayed with the cumulative number of prize balls increased by "10", and after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the next prize ball number display 028IW004 is updated. Is started), and the second total display is updated collectively regardless of the number of occurrences of a specific event (for example, as shown in Fig. 9-47, in response to winning two special prize openings at once. Small hit RUSH prize ball number display 028IW011 is updated). Therefore, while the first total display can be emphasized so that the number of occurrences of a specific event can be recognized, the second total display can be quickly updated.

Further, according to the feature unit 028IW, a counting means (for example, a prize ball number counter) for counting the total advantageous value is provided, and a special effect (for example, when the total advantageous value reaches a predetermined value) is provided. For example, 5000 OVER display 028IW021) can be executed. In this case, regardless of the counting value of the counting means, the special effect is executed based on the fact that the total of the advantageous values indicated by the total display reaches a predetermined value (for example, FIGS. 9-49 and 9-50 are shown). As described above, regardless of the value of the prize ball counter, the 5000 OVER display 028IW021 is displayed based on the cumulative number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number display 028IW004 exceeds 5000). Therefore, it is possible to notify that the total of the advantageous values has reached a predetermined value regardless of the count value of the counting means.

Further, according to the feature unit 028IW, a counting means (for example, a prize ball number counter) for counting the total advantageous value is provided, and a special effect (for example, when the total advantageous value reaches a predetermined value) is provided. For example, 5000 OVER display 028IW005) can be executed. In this case, regardless of the total display, the special effect is executed based on the fact that the counting value of the counting means reaches a predetermined value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-41, regardless of the prize ball number display 028IW004. , 5000 OVER display 028IW005 is displayed based on the fact that the value of the prize ball counter has already exceeded 5000). Therefore, regardless of the total display, it is possible to notify that the total of the advantageous values has reached a predetermined value.

Further, according to the feature unit 028IW, the display mode of the total display is changed during the period when the advantageous value does not increase (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-42 (D), the reach is established timing. Then, it can be switched to the prize ball number display 028IW006 of the low transparency display). Therefore, the total display can be displayed in an appropriate display mode depending on the situation.

In this example, the case where the period after the reach establishment timing is shown as the "period in which the advantageous value does not increase" is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, when a predetermined period elapses after the variable display is uniformly started, it may be determined that it is a "period in which the advantageous value does not increase" and the display may be switched to the prize ball number display of the low transmittance display. .. Any method may be used as long as it is determined by some method that the update of all the prize ball number display is supposed to be completed, and the prize ball number display is switched to the low transparency display.

Further, in this example, the case of switching to the low-transparency display of the number of prize balls at the time when the reach is established is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the reach is established, the display color of the prize ball number display may be gray, and the visibility of the prize ball number display may be reduced in some way.

Further, according to the feature unit 028IW, when the total display is updated, the total display is enlarged and displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-36 (D), the number of prize balls is displayed from the prize ball number display 028IW002. It is enlarged and displayed on 028IW004, and the update display of the prize ball number display 028IW004 is started). Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize the update status of the total display.

Further, according to the present feature unit 028IW, it is possible to control an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit gaming state), and a special state different from the advantageous state and advantageous for the player (for example, small). It is possible to control the hit game state). In addition, it is possible to control a special state (for example, a high probability / second KT state) that is more frequently controlled to a special state than a non-special state (for example, a low probability / low base state). Therefore, in a game machine configured to be controllable to a special state, which is frequently controlled to a special state, it is possible to emphasize the total display while emphasizing that a plurality of specific events have occurred, which improves the interest. Can be done.

Further, according to the feature unit 028IW, an advantageous value (for example, a prize ball) can be given based on the occurrence of a specific event (for example, the occurrence of a prize in a special winning opening). Further, it is possible to display a predetermined display (for example, "+10" display 028IW003) corresponding to the advantageous value based on the occurrence of a specific event, and a total display corresponding to the total advantageous value (for example, prize ball number display 028IW002). 004) can be displayed. In addition, in the first period in which a specific event can occur (for example, the period during the small hit game), a predetermined display is displayed based on the occurrence of the specific event, and the second period (for example, the length is different from the first period). , The period after the end of the small hit game), the total display is updated based on the occurrence of a specific event. In addition, it is possible to control a special state (for example, high probability / second KT state) that is easily controlled in the first period. Further, when a predetermined condition corresponding to the end of the special state is satisfied (for example, the start of the jackpot fluctuation), a notification effect for notifying the cumulative value of the advantageous value given in the special state (for example, FIG. 9-46 (C)). The total prize ball number notification shown in)) can be executed, and the cumulative value counting means (for example, the second KT middle prize ball number counter) for counting the cumulative value of the advantageous value given in the special state is provided. Further, the total display can be displayed in the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-46 (A), the prize ball number display 028IW004 is displayed during the second KT state), and the predetermined condition is satisfied in the second period. At that time, regardless of the display status of the total display, the notification effect is executed based on the count value of the cumulative value counting means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-46, the prize ball number display 028IW004 is being updated. However, the prize ball number display 028IW004 is deleted and the total prize ball number notification is displayed). Therefore, the cumulative value of the advantageous value given in the special state is counted independently of the total display, and the notification effect is executed based on the counted value, so that the control burden when executing the notification effect is reduced. be able to.

In this example, assuming that the predetermined condition is satisfied at the start of the big hit fluctuation, the case where the small hit RUSH end display is displayed and then the total prize ball number notification is displayed is shown, but it is limited to such a mode. Absent. For example, the notification effect (for example, total prize ball number notification) may be executed assuming that a predetermined condition is satisfied at the time of transition to the jackpot game state or at the transition of the game state after the jackpot game is completed.

Further, according to the feature unit 028IW, an advantageous value (for example, a prize ball) can be given based on the occurrence of a specific event (for example, the occurrence of a prize in a special winning opening). Further, it is possible to display a predetermined display (for example, "+10" display 028IW003) corresponding to the advantageous value based on the occurrence of a specific event, and a total display corresponding to the total advantageous value (for example, prize ball number display 028IW002). 004) can be displayed. In addition, in the first period in which a specific event can occur (for example, the period during the small hit game), a predetermined display is displayed based on the occurrence of the specific event, and the second period (for example, the length is different from the first period). , The period after the end of the small hit game), the total display is updated based on the occurrence of a specific event. Also, the second period is longer than the first period (see FIGS. 9-39 and 9-40). Further, when a new specific event occurs during the update of the total display after the lapse of the first period, the predetermined display is not displayed based on the occurrence of the new specific event (for example, FIGS. 9-43). In the case of a delayed ball, the "+10" display is not displayed), and the total display is updated based on the occurrence of the new specific event (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-43, a prize is won. The prize ball number display 028IW004 is updated every time for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds)). Therefore, while suppressing the increase in the control burden, the new specific event that occurred after the lapse of the first period is reflected in the total display, so that if a new specific event occurs after the lapse of the first period, the decline in interest is suppressed. be able to.

In this example, "when a new specific event occurs after the lapse of the first period and while updating the total display" specifically means that a prize is won immediately before the special variable winning ball device 17 is closed. In such a case, at the timing when the winning game ball is detected by the second count switch 24, the small hit game has already ended and the update of the prize ball number display has started, resulting in a delayed ball.

Further, according to the feature unit 028IW, an advantageous value (for example, a prize ball) can be given based on the occurrence of a specific event (for example, the occurrence of a prize in a special winning opening). Further, it is possible to display a predetermined display (for example, "+10" display 028IW003) corresponding to the advantageous value based on the occurrence of a specific event, and a total display corresponding to the total advantageous value (for example, prize ball number display 028IW002). 004) can be displayed. In addition, in the first period in which a specific event can occur (for example, the period during the small hit game), a predetermined display is displayed based on the occurrence of the specific event, and the second period (for example, the length is different from the first period). , The period after the end of the small hit game), the total display is updated based on the occurrence of a specific event. Further, at least a part of the display area of the total display overlaps with at least a part of the variable display area of the identification information (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-36 to 9-38). The display area partially overlaps between the variable display of the symbol 028IW001 and the prize ball number display 028IW002,004). Further, during the variable display period of the identification information, the total display is displayed with higher visibility than the identification information (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-36 (A), the variation display of the decorative symbol 028IW001 is low in the second KT state. Since it is displayed with transparency, the prize ball number display 028IW002 has higher visibility), and during the display period of the variable display result of the identification information, the total display is displayed with lower visibility than the identification information ( For example, as shown in FIG. 9-36 (B), when the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 028IW001 is confirmed and displayed, the transparency of the decorative symbol 028IW001 is returned to the normal transmittance, and the variable display of the decorative symbol 028IW001 is displayed. Since the prize ball number display is displayed on the display layer having a higher priority than the prize ball number display 028IW002 (see FIG. 9-35), the display of the prize ball number display 028IW002 is difficult to see because it is hidden by the decorative symbol 028IW001 with a high priority. Become). Therefore, during the variable display period of the identification information, it is possible to secure the visibility of the variable display result of the identification information while emphasizing the total display, and when the display area of the total display and the variable display area of the identification information overlap. Appropriate display control can be performed.

In addition, when a symbol that does not include numbers (for example, a character symbol) is displayed in a variable manner instead of the decorative symbol that includes numbers as shown in this example, the "+10" display or the number of prize balls shown in this example is displayed. You may apply the configuration which performs the update display of. In this case, since the symbol does not include a number, the visibility does not deteriorate so much even if it partially overlaps with the "+10" display or the prize ball number display.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 028IW)
In relation to the above-mentioned feature portion 028IW, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-166815 displays a "+10" prize ball number image when a small hit game is started and a game ball wins in the second large winning opening. It is described that the prize-winning effect is executed, the prize ball number image is added, and the payout number image is updated during the period. However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the degree of emphasis when a plurality of specific events occur consecutively within a short period of time is insufficient, and there is room for improvement.

(Means A1) Therefore, the gaming machine of means A1 according to the feature unit 028IW (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of playing a game) is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and a specific event occurs. A value-giving means (for example, a payout control microcomputer) capable of giving an advantageous value (for example, a prize ball) based on (for example, the occurrence of a prize in a special winning opening) and an advantageous value based on the occurrence of a specific event. Display control means (for example, "+10" display 028IW003) capable of displaying a predetermined display (for example, "+10" display 028IW003) and a total display (for example, prize ball number display 028IW002,004) corresponding to the total of advantageous values. , The portion that executes steps 028IWS708 and S668 in the effect control CPU 120), and the display control means generates a specific event in the first period (for example, a period during the small hit game) in which the specific event can occur. The predetermined display is displayed based on the above, and in the second period (for example, the period after the end of the small hit game), which is different in length from the first period, the total display is updated based on the occurrence of a specific event, and the second period. Is longer than the first period (see FIGS. 9-39 and 9-40), and when a plurality of specific events occur, the display control means performs a predetermined display in a manner corresponding to the plurality of specific events in the first period. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 9-36 (C), 9-38 (K), 9-39 and 9-40, "+10" display 028IW003 is displayed for each prize). The total display is updated in response to a plurality of specific events in two periods (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-36 to 9-40, the number of prize balls over a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) for each prize. Display 028IW004 is updated). According to such a configuration, the total display can be emphasized because the total display is updated in the second period, which is longer than the first period, while emphasizing that a plurality of specific events have occurred in the first period. Therefore, it is possible to emphasize the total display while emphasizing that a plurality of specific events have occurred, and it is possible to improve the interest.

(Means A2) In means A1, the second period may further include the first period (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-40, a special winning opening generated during the first small hit game. The update of the prize ball number display corresponding to the winning of the prize may not be completed by the end of the second small hit game), the display control means is a new specific event in the first period of the second period. When the new specific event occurs, after the end of the first period in which the new specific event occurs, the total display is updated in response to the new specific event (for example, two as shown in FIG. 9-40). After finishing the small hit game of the eyes, after the update of the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning to the special winning opening that occurred during the first small hit game is completed, the second small hit game The update of the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning of the special winning opening generated inside may be started). According to such a configuration, even if a new specific event occurs during the second period, the total display can be emphasized, and the interest can be improved.

(Means A3) In the means A1 or the means A2, when a plurality of specific events occur, the display control means updates the total display according to the number of occurrences of the specific events (for example, FIGS. 9-36 to 9). As shown in 9-40, when the update for one prize is completed, the prize ball number display 028IW004 is temporarily stopped and displayed with the cumulative number of prize balls increased by "10", and is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0. After 5 seconds), the next update of the prize ball number display 028IW004 is started)). According to such a configuration, the total display can be emphasized so that the number of occurrences of a specific event can be recognized.

(Means A4) In any of the means A1 to the means A3, the display control means shows the first total display (for example, the prize ball number display 028IW002,004) and the second total display (for example, FIG. 9-47). It is possible to display the small hit RUSH prize ball number display 028IW011), and when a plurality of specific events occur, the first total display is updated according to the number of times corresponding to the number of occurrences of the specific event (for example, FIG. 9-47). As shown in the above, when the update for one prize is completed, the prize ball number display 028IW004 is temporarily stopped and displayed with the cumulative number of prize balls increased by "10" for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). (The update of the next prize ball number display 028IW004 is started), and the second total display is updated collectively regardless of the number of occurrences of a specific event (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-47) at once. The small hit RUSH prize ball number display 028IW011 is updated in response to winning two special prize openings). According to such a configuration, the first total display can be emphasized so that the number of occurrences of a specific event can be recognized, while the second total display can be quickly updated.

(Means A5) In any of means A1 to means A4, a counting means for counting the total of advantageous values (for example, a prize ball count counter) and corresponding to the total of advantageous values reaching a predetermined value. A special effect executing means (for example, a portion that executes step 028IWS929 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a special effect (for example, 5000 OVER display 028IW021) is provided, and the special effect executing means is a counting value of the counting means. Regardless of, the special effect is executed based on the total of the advantageous values indicated by the total display reaching a predetermined value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-49 and 9-50, the prize ball count counter). Regardless of the value of, 5000 OVER display 028IW021 is displayed based on the cumulative number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number display 028IW004 exceeds 5000). According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the total of the advantageous values has reached a predetermined value regardless of the counting value of the counting means.

(Means A6) In any of means A1 to means A4, a counting means for counting the total of advantageous values (for example, a prize ball counter) and a correspondence that the total of advantageous values reaches a predetermined value. A special effect executing means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 028IWS929) capable of executing a special effect (for example, 5000 OVER display 028IW005) is provided, and the special effect executing means is provided regardless of the total display. , A special effect is executed based on the fact that the counting value of the counting means reaches a predetermined value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-41, the value of the prize ball counter is irrespective of the prize ball number display 028IW004. The 5000 OVER display 028IW005 may be displayed based on the fact that the number has already exceeded 5000). According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the total of advantageous values has reached a predetermined value regardless of the total display.

(Means A7) In any of means A1 to means A6, the display control means changes the display mode of the total display during a period in which the advantageous value does not increase (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-42 (D)). In addition, it may be switched to the prize ball number display 028IW006 of the low transmittance display based on the reach establishment timing). According to such a configuration, the total display can be displayed in an appropriate display mode depending on the situation.

(Means A8) In any one of means A1 to means A7, when the display control means updates the total display, the total display is enlarged and displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-36 (D)). , The prize ball number display 028IW002 is enlarged and displayed from the prize ball number display 028IW004, and the update display of the prize ball number display 028IW004 is started). According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the update status of the total display.

(Means A9) In any one of the means A1 to the means A8, an advantageous state control means (for example, step S123 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player. A special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player. (Part of executing steps S126 to S128) in the above, and a special state (for example, high probability / second KT state) that is more frequently controlled as a special state than a non-special state (for example, low probability / low base state). It may be configured to include a possible special state control means (eg, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 028IWS2205 and S2206). According to such a configuration, it is possible to emphasize the total display while emphasizing that a plurality of specific events have occurred in a game machine configured to be controllable to a special state, which is frequently controlled to a special state. , Can improve the interest.

(Explanation of Feature 013SH and Feature 014SH)
Next, a game machine related to the feature unit 013SH and the feature unit 014SH will be described. The feature unit 013SH and the feature unit 014SH can have the same configuration. Therefore, in the following, the feature unit 013SH will be described and the description of the feature unit 014SH will be omitted unless the description is particularly distinguished.

(Regarding the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 013SH)
Next, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 013SH will be described with reference to FIG. 10-1. FIG. 10-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 013SH. As shown in FIG. 10-1, in the feature unit 013SH, as shown in FIG. 10-1, the right side region of the game board 2 is different from the configuration shown in FIG. FIG. 10-1 describes a portion having a configuration different from that of FIG.

In FIG. 10-1, a variable winning ball device 013SH6A having a first starting winning opening is provided below the passing gate 41. The variable winning ball device 013SH6A performs opening control when the game ball hits the normal drawing based on passing through the passing gate 41. Specifically, the variable winning ball device 013SH6A is opened when the normal symbol hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20, and the game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening. Become.

A first start opening switch 22A capable of detecting a winning game ball in the first start winning opening is provided in the first start winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls is paid out as a prize ball based on the detected information.

Further, below the winning ball device 013SH6B, a special variable winning ball device 013SH7 forming a large winning opening is provided. A switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the large winning opening is provided in the large winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 12) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detected information. The special variable winning ball device 013SH7 is open-controlled in the jackpot game state.

Further, a special variable winning ball device 013SH17 forming a special winning opening is provided at the lower left of the special variable winning ball device 013SH7. A switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the special winning opening is provided in the special winning opening. When the game balls are detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detected information. The special variable winning ball device 013SH17 is open-controlled in the small hit game state.

Further, a winning ball device 013SH6B having a second starting winning opening is provided at the lower left of the special variable winning ball device 013SH7. A second start opening switch 22B capable of detecting a winning game ball in the second start winning opening is provided in the second start winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls is paid out as a prize ball based on the detected information.

In addition, it is supplemented that the number of prize balls by winning a prize in the second start winning opening is set to "1". The winning ball device 013SH6B is arranged at the most downstream side where the game ball launched in the right side region flows down. For this reason, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 013SH, the gaming ball launched in the right side region can easily win a prize in the second starting winning opening. Since it is easy to win a prize in the second start winning opening, if the number of prize balls is increased, the base will rise in the KT state described later. If the base is raised in the KT state, the player's advantage is excessively increased, the gambling property is increased, and a sound game may not be realized. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 013SH suppresses the increase in gambling and realizes a sound game by setting the number of prize balls by winning in the second start winning opening to "1". ing.

The game ball that has flowed down below the winning ball device 013SH6B may be awarded to the winning ball device 013SH6B (inside the second starting winning opening), or may flow down to the side of the special variable winning ball device 013SH7 or the special variable winning ball device 013SH17. , There is. For example, there are cases where the winning ball device 013SH6B is won by a group of nails forming a flow path of the game ball, a structure that alternately distributes the flow direction of the game ball, and a case where the special variable winning ball device 013SH7 or the special variable winning ball device 013SH17. There may be cases where it flows down to the side of.

In the feature unit 013SH, the probability of hitting a normal figure in a normal figure game is low (for example, 1/100) when controlled to a low base state (normal state, KT state), and a high base state. High when controlled to (non-KT state) (eg 99/100) Also, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 013SH6A is short when controlled to a low base state (normal state, KT state). High (eg, 0.1 seconds), high when controlled to high base state (non-KT state) (eg, 1 second). Further, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the normal figure game is long when controlled to the low base state and short when controlled to the high base state.

(About the game in the normal state)
In the feature unit 013SH, when the game is set to the normal state (low probability / low base state), the game is played by hitting the left side, and the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning opening) is mainly used to win the game. 1 Special figure game is played. If a right-handed hit is made while the ball is controlled to the normal state, many game balls will pass through the passing gate 41. However, when it is controlled to the normal state, the probability of hitting the normal figure in the normal figure game is low, and even if it hits the normal figure, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 013SH6A is short, and further, the opening time of the normal figure is short. The fluctuation time is also long. For this reason, the variable winning ball device 013SH6A (first starting winning opening) is rarely opened, and most of the game balls do not win the variable winning ball device 013SH6A.

Therefore, even if a right-handed hit is made while the ball is controlled to the normal state, most of the game balls flow down to the winning ball device 014SH6B (second starting winning opening) below the variable winning ball device 013SH6A. The game ball flowing down to the winning ball device 013SH6B can win a prize in the winning ball device 013SH6B. When the game ball wins the winning ball device 013SH6B, the second special figure game is started. However, in the second special figure game when it is controlled to the normal state, the fluctuation time is set to a long time. Therefore, even if the player makes a right-handed hit while being controlled to the normal state, the player's profit is low, and the right-handed hit is not suitable.

If a right-handed hit is made while the player is in the normal state, a notification to the left-handed hit is sent. Specifically, for example, when a predetermined number of game balls are detected by the gate switch 21 of the passing gate 41 within a predetermined time, the pachinko gaming machine 1 determines that right-handed hitting is being performed, and right-handed hitting. Notifies that it is prohibited and that it encourages left-handed strikes.

(About games in high base state)
When controlled to a high base state (non-KT state: low probability / high base state and high probability / high base state), the first is based on winning the variable winning ball device 013SH6A (first starting winning opening) by hitting right. 1 Special figure game is played. Specifically, if a right-handed player is hit while being controlled to a high base state, many game balls will pass through the passing gate 41. When controlled to a high base state, there is a high probability of hitting a normal figure in a normal figure game, and the opening time of the variable winning ball device 013SH6A when hitting a normal figure is long, and further, fluctuations in the normal figure The time is short.

Therefore, when the control is performed in the high base state, the variable winning ball device 013SH6A (first starting winning opening) is frequently opened. As a result, when a right-handed ball is hit while being controlled to a high base state, many game balls win the variable winning ball device 013SH6A. Therefore, right-handed is suitable when controlled to a high base state.

On the other hand, a passing gate or the like is not provided on the left side of the game board 2. Therefore, even if the player hits the left while being controlled to the high base state, it is difficult to start the normal game. As a result, the variable winning ball device 013SH6A (first starting winning opening) is unlikely to be opened. Therefore, even if a left-handed player is hit while being controlled to a high base state, the player's profit is low, so the left-handed player is not suitable. When controlled to a high base state, a notification is given to encourage right-handed strike.

(About games in the KT state)
When controlled to the KT state (high probability / low base state), a second special figure game is played by winning a prize in the winning ball device 013SH6B (second starting winning opening) by hitting right. Here, if a right-handed hit is made while being controlled in the KT state, many game balls will pass through the passing gate 41. However, when controlled to the KT state, the probability of hitting the normal figure in the normal figure game is low, and even if it hits the normal figure, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 013SH6A is short, and further, the normal figure The fluctuation time of is also long.

Therefore, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 013SH6A (first starting winning opening) is opened while being controlled to the KT state is low. As a result, the game ball launched into the right region by right-handed hitting flows down to the winning ball device 013SH6B (second starting winning opening) below the variable winning ball device 013SH6A without winning the variable winning ball device 013SH6A. ..

The game ball flowing down to the winning ball device 013SH6B can win a prize in the winning ball device 013SH6B. In the second special figure game by winning a prize in the winning ball device 013SH6B in the KT state, the fluctuation time is very short (for example, 2 seconds). In addition, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the KT state is high (for example, 67%). Further, on the right side of the game board 2, a special variable winning ball device 013SH17 that is opened when a small hit occurs is provided.

Therefore, in the KT state, a small hit game is likely to occur. Therefore, when the KT state is controlled, it is possible to obtain a ball output by a small hit by hitting right. Therefore, right-handed is suitable when controlled to the KT state. When the player is controlled to the KT state, a notification is given to encourage a right-handed strike.

On the other hand, on the left side of the game board 2, there is a winning ball device (variable winning ball device) having a second starting winning opening for starting the second special figure game, and a special opening state when a small hit occurs. The variable winning ball device 013SH17 is not provided. For this reason, if a left-handed player is hit, a small hit cannot be obtained. Therefore, left-handed is not suitable when controlled to the KT state.

(Regarding the transition of the gaming state in the feature unit 013SH)
Next, the transition of the gaming state in the feature unit 013SH and the effect mode in each gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. 10-2. FIG. 10-2 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the gaming state related to the feature unit 013SH. As shown in FIG. 10-2, the gaming states are low probability / low base state (normal state), low probability / high base state (time saving state), high probability / high base state (probability variation state), and high. There is a probability / low base state (KT state). The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 013SH controls in any of these gaming states. Of the four gaming states, the most frequently controlled gaming state is the normal state. In most cases, the player starts the game in a controlled state under normal conditions.

(About the transition from the normal state to another game state)
When controlled to the normal state, the game is mainly advanced by the first special figure game. It is assumed that a display result indicating a 10R normal jackpot is derived and displayed in the special figure game in the normal state. In this case, the big hit game as usual in 10R is executed. After the 10R normal jackpot jackpot game is executed, the time is shortened.

Further, it is assumed that the display result indicating the 10R probability variation jackpot is derived and displayed in the special figure game in the normal state. In this case, the jackpot game according to the 10R probability variation is executed. After the big hit game of the 10R probability change big hit is executed, the state shifts to the probability change state.

Further, it is assumed that the display result indicating the 2R probability variation jackpot is derived and displayed in the special figure game in the normal state. In this case, the jackpot game according to the 2R probability variation is executed. After the jackpot game of the 2R probability variation jackpot is executed, the state shifts to the KT state.

(About the transition from the time saving state to another gaming state)
When the time is controlled to be shortened, the game is mainly advanced by the first special figure game. In the special figure game in the time saving state, when the variable display of the loss is changed by 50 without deriving the display result of the big hit, the normal state is entered.

It is assumed that the display result indicating the 10R normal jackpot is derived and displayed in the special figure game in the time saving state. In this case, the big hit game as usual in 10R is executed. After the big hit game of 10R normal big hit is executed, it is controlled to the time saving state again.

Further, it is assumed that the display result indicating the 10R probability variation jackpot is derived and displayed in the special figure game in the time saving state. In this case, the jackpot game according to the 10R probability variation is executed. After the big hit game of the 10R probability change big hit is executed, the state shifts to the probability change state.

Further, it is assumed that the display result indicating the 2R probability variation jackpot is derived and displayed in the special figure game in the time saving state. In this case, the jackpot game according to the 2R probability variation is executed. After the jackpot game of the 2R probability variation jackpot is executed, the state shifts to the KT state.

(About the transition from the probability change state to another game state)
When controlled to the probabilistic state, the game is mainly advanced by the first special figure game. In the special figure game in the probabilistic state, the probabilistic state is maintained even if the jackpot display result is not derived and displayed, that is, no matter how many variations of the variable display in which the loss display result is derived and displayed. However, since the probability variation state is a high probability state, it is almost impossible that the variable display in which the display result of the loss is derived and displayed is continuously performed hundreds of times.

It is assumed that the display result indicating the 10R normal jackpot is derived and displayed in the special figure game in the probabilistic state. In this case, the big hit game as usual in 10R is executed. After the 10R normal jackpot jackpot game is executed, the time is shortened.

Further, it is assumed that the display result indicating the 10R probability variation jackpot is derived and displayed in the special figure game in the probability variation state. In this case, the jackpot game according to the 10R probability variation is executed. After the jackpot game of the 10R probability variation jackpot is executed, the probability variation state is controlled again.

Further, it is assumed that the display result indicating the 2R probability variation jackpot is derived and displayed in the special figure game in the probability variation state. In this case, the jackpot game according to the 2R probability variation is executed. After the jackpot game of the 2R probability variation jackpot is executed, the state shifts to the KT state.

(About the transition from the KT state to another game state)
When controlled to the KT state, the game is mainly advanced by the second special figure game. In the KT state, the display result indicating the small hit is easily derived and displayed in the special figure game, and many small hits occur. In the special figure game in the KT state, even if the display result of the big hit is not derived and displayed, that is, no matter how many variable displays in which the display result of the small hit or the loss is derived and displayed are changed, the KT state remains. Be retained. However, since the probability variation state is a high probability state, it is almost impossible that the variable display in which the display result of the small hit or the loss is derived and displayed is continuously performed hundreds of times.

In the special figure game in the KT state, it is assumed that the display result indicating the 10R normal jackpot is derived and displayed. In this case, the big hit game as usual in 10R is executed. After the 10R normal jackpot jackpot game is executed, the time is shortened.

Further, it is assumed that the display result indicating the 10R probability variation jackpot is derived and displayed in the special figure game in the KT state. In this case, the jackpot game according to the 10R probability variation is executed. After the big hit game of the 10R probability change big hit is executed, the state shifts to the probability change state.

Further, it is assumed that the display result indicating the 2R probability variation jackpot is derived and displayed in the special figure game in the KT state. In this case, the jackpot game according to the 2R probability variation is executed. After the jackpot game of 2R probability variation jackpot is executed, it is controlled to the KT state again.

Further, it is assumed that the display result indicating the 10R probability variation jackpot is derived and displayed in the special figure game of the first special symbol in the KT state. In this case, the first special symbol is displayed in a special variable manner for 6 minutes. While the special variable display is performed for 6 minutes, it is controlled to the special KT state. Further, in the special KT state, the small hit determination of the second special symbol is performed, but the large hit determination is not performed. Therefore, in the special KT state, the display result indicating the small hit is easily derived and displayed in the special figure game of the second special symbol, and many small hits occur.

When the fluctuation end timing of the special variable display of the first special symbol is reached, the display result indicating the 10R probability variation jackpot is derived and displayed. Then, the big hit game according to the 10R probability change is executed. After the big hit game of the 10R probability change big hit is executed, the state shifts to the probability change state.

In addition, in the special figure game of the first special symbol in the KT state, when the display result indicating the 2R probability variation jackpot is derived and displayed, or when the display result indicating the 10R normal jackpot is derived and displayed, the state shifts to the special KT state. To do. However, when the display result indicating the 2R probability variation jackpot is derived and displayed, the state shifts to the KT state when the special variable display for 6 minutes is completed. Further, when the display result indicating the 10R normal jackpot is derived and displayed, when the special variable display for 6 minutes is completed, the time is shortened.

(About the production mode in each game state)
In the normal state, the effect mode is controlled to the normal mode. In the time saving state, the effect mode is controlled to the time saving mode. In the probabilistic state, the effect mode is controlled to the probabilistic mode. In the KT state, the effect mode is controlled to one of the small hit RUSH mode A and the small hit RUSH mode B. Whether to control in the small hit RUSH mode A or the small hit RUSH mode B is based on the player's choice.

In the special KT state, one of the small hit RUSH mode A and the small hit RUSH mode B, which was controlled in the KT state, may be continuously controlled. Further, in the special KT state, it may be controlled to a special effect mode (remaining time suggestion mode described later). Whether it is controlled to the special effect mode or the executed small hit RUSH modes A and B are continuously controlled is determined by the type of 10R probability variation jackpot (10R probability variation jackpot A, B). Specifically, when the jackpot game of the 10R probability variation jackpot B is executed, the special effect mode is controlled after the jackpot game. Further, when the big hit game of the 10R probability variation big hit A is executed, it is controlled to either the small hit RUSH mode A or B that has been executed after the big hit game.

(Outline of feature part 013SH)
Next, the outline of the feature unit 013SH will be described with reference to FIG. 10-3. FIG. 10-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an outline of the feature unit 013SH. As shown in FIG. 10-3, it is assumed that the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 013SH is controlled to the jackpot gaming state 013SH1001 of the 2R probability variation jackpot. After being controlled to the jackpot gaming state 013SH1001 of the 2R probability variation jackpot, it is controlled to the KT state 013SH1002. In the KT state 013SH1002, the effect is performed by one of the small hit RUSH mode A and the small hit RUSH mode B.

Here, during the ending period in the jackpot gaming state 013SH1001 of the 2R probability variation jackpot, the mode selection 013SH1010 for selecting one of the small hit RUSH mode A and the small hit RUSH mode B is performed. Mode selection 013SH1010 accepts the selection of one of the production modes from the player. When the player does not select any of the effect modes, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may select one of the preset effect modes (for example, small hit RUSH mode A).

Next, the KT state 013SH1002 will be described. In the KT state 013SH1002, one of the effect modes selected in the mode selection 013SH1010 is executed. The KT state 013SH1002 is a gaming state in which small hits are likely to occur due to the variable display of the second special symbol. Further, the second special symbol and the first special symbol are variably displayed in parallel regardless of the game state.

Here, it is assumed that the jackpot determination result of the first special symbol in the KT state 013SH1002 is determined to be a 10R probability variation jackpot. In this case, a 6-minute fluctuation pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol. Then, a 6-minute variable display (big hit fluctuation) is performed. The KT state 013SH1002 continues even during this 6-minute variable display. Therefore, even during the 6-minute variable display, small hits frequently occur due to the variable display of the second special symbol.

In the feature unit 013SH, small hits frequently occur during this 6-minute variable display, and by winning a prize in the special variable winning ball device 013SH17, for example, approximately 1200 prize balls can be expected. .. It should be noted that the prize balls (1200 balls) during the 6-minute variable display are supplemented. The number of prize balls for winning one ball in the special variable winning ball device 17 is 10. In the small hit game state, the number of balls that can be expected to win in the special variable winning ball device 17 depends on the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17, the flow path of the game ball, and the like, and is, for example, "1".

Therefore, in order to play 1200 prize balls during the 6-minute variable display, it is necessary to perform 120 small hit games. When converted to 1 minute, in order to play 200 balls (1200 balls / 6 minutes), it is necessary to perform 20 small hit games (120 times / 6 minutes). Therefore, the small hit probability, the fluctuation time, the time controlled by the small hit game, and the like may be set so that the small hit game is performed 20 times per minute.

In the feature unit 013SH, the small hit probability is 66%, the fluctuation time is 0.5 seconds, the symbol confirmation time is 0.5 seconds, and the time controlled by the small hit game is 1.5 seconds. When the small hit game is executed, the time from the start of the variable display to the end of the small hit game is controlled to 2.5 seconds (variation time 0.5 seconds + symbol confirmation time 0.5 seconds + small hit game). Time is 1.5 seconds). In the case of loss, the time from the start to the end of the variable display is 1.0 second (variation time 0.5 seconds + symbol confirmation time 0.5 seconds). Since the small hit game is executed in 66%, 2.5 seconds are spent by the small hit fluctuation and the small hit game twice in three times. On the other hand, once every three times, 1.0 second is spent due to the fluctuation of the loss. Therefore, the small hit game is performed twice in 6 seconds. When converted to 1 minute (60 seconds), 20 small hit games will be played. When converted to 6 minutes, 120 small hit games will be played. Since the feature unit 013SH is set so that 120 small hit games are performed in 6 minutes, 1200 prize balls can be expected.

Further, in the feature unit 013SH, when the variable display of 6 minutes is started, the effect of the remaining time suggestion mode is executed. In the remaining time suggestion mode, an effect of suggesting the remaining time of the variable display of 6 minutes is performed.

When the 6-minute variable display is completed, a display result indicating a 10R probability variation jackpot is derived and displayed. Then, it is controlled to the jackpot game state 013SH1003 of the 10R probability variation jackpot. In the feature unit 013SH, when controlled by the jackpot game state 013SH1003, a prize ball for 10 rounds, for example, about 1200 prize balls can be expected by winning a prize in the special variable prize ball device 013SH7. .. Further, in the jackpot game state 013SH1003, a special jackpot effect is executed.

The prize balls (1200 balls) for 10 rounds will be supplemented. The number of prize balls by winning one ball in the special variable winning ball device 013SH7 is 12 balls. In addition, one round ends with winning 10 times (10 balls). Therefore, 120 prize balls (12 balls x 10 times) can be expected per round. The prize balls for 10 rounds are obtained by multiplying (10 times) the number of prize balls per round (120 balls x 10 rounds = 1200 balls). Therefore, the prize balls for 10 rounds are 1200 balls.

After being controlled to the jackpot gaming state 013SH1003 of the 10R probability variation jackpot, it is controlled to the probability variation gaming state 013SH1004. In the probabilistic game state 013SH1004, the effect in the probabilistic mode is executed. In the probabilistic game state 013SH1004, the high base state is set, and the game is mainly advanced by the variable display of the first special symbol. The probabilistic game state 013SH1004 is continued until the next big hit occurs. Therefore, it can be said that the probabilistic game state 013SH1004 is a game state in which the next big hit is confirmed.

Here, the number of prize balls according to the following types of jackpots will be described. If the next big hit is a 2R probability variable big hit, you can expect about 240 prize balls for 2 rounds. The prize balls for two rounds can be obtained by multiplying (double) the number of prize balls per round (120 balls x 2 rounds = 240 balls). Further, the 2R probability variation jackpot may be a jackpot without a ball. A jackpot without a ball is a jackpot with a short opening time of the special variable winning ball device 013SH17 in the jackpot game state.

After the 2R probability variation jackpot game, the KT state is controlled to 013SH1002. In the KT state, since it is controlled to a high probability state, at least the next big hit prize ball and the prize ball due to the occurrence of the small hit until the big hit is won can be expected.

If the next jackpot is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a prize ball of approximately 1200 balls ((120 balls x 10 rounds = 1200 balls)) for 10 rounds can be expected. Further, since the 10R probability variation jackpot game is controlled to the probability variation game state, at least one more jackpot prize ball (1200 balls) can be expected.

If the next big hit is a 10R normal big hit, you can expect about 1200 prize balls for 10 rounds. Then, after the big hit game of 10R normal big hit, it is controlled to the time saving state. If the jackpot is not won during the 50 fluctuations controlled in the time saving state, the normal state is restored.

Therefore, it can be suggested that at least 1200 balls × 3 times worth of prize balls are determined by starting the effect in the remaining time suggestion mode. Therefore, by starting the production in the remaining time suggestion mode, it is possible to expect the player to have many prize balls.

(About each means of the game machine related to the feature unit 013SH)
Next, each means of the gaming machine according to the feature unit 013SH will be described. The gaming machine according to the feature unit 013SH includes a game state control means, a variable display execution means, a setting means, an information output means, and an effect control means. The game state control means, the variable display execution means, the setting means, and the information output means are realized by, for example, the CPU 103 of the main board 11. The effect execution means is realized by, for example, the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12.

The variable display execution means variably displays the identification information, and derives and displays the variable display result. The variable display executing means can execute the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information in parallel. The first identification information is, for example, the first special symbol. The second identification information is, for example, a second special symbol. The variable display executing means starts the variable display of the identification information when the start condition is satisfied, and stops the variable display of the identification information when a predetermined fluctuation time elapses.

The game state control means can control a plurality of types of advantageous states, special states, and special states. The advantageous state is, for example, a jackpot game state. The special state is, for example, a small hit game state. The special state is, for example, the KT state. In the following, the KT state may also be referred to as a “small hit RUSH state”.

The plurality of types of advantageous states include a first advantageous state, a second advantageous state having a lower advantage than the first advantageous state, and a third advantageous state different from the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state. .. In the feature unit 013SH, the plurality of types of advantageous states are, for example, 10R (round) normal jackpot, 10R probability variation jackpot, and 2R probability variation jackpot, each jackpot gaming state. The first advantageous state is, for example, a 10R probability variation jackpot. The second advantageous state is, for example, a 10R normal jackpot. The third advantageous state is, for example, a 2R probability variation jackpot.

After the big hit game of 10R normal big hit, it is controlled to the low probability / high base state. After the jackpot game of 10R probability variation jackpot, it is controlled to a high probability / high base state. After the jackpot game of 2R probability variation jackpot, it is controlled to a high probability / low base state (KT state). In the present embodiment, the plurality of types of advantageous states are three types of advantageous states, but the present invention is not limited to this, and four or more types of advantageous states may be taken.

The game state control means controls the advantageous state according to the specific display result based on the fact that the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the variable display result. Further, the game state control means controls the special state based on the fact that the special display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the variable display result.

In the feature unit 013SH, the special state (KT state) is a game state in which the game value is easily given by the special state based on the variable display of the second identification information. In the KT state, the game proceeds mainly by the variable display of the second identification information. In the variable display of the second identification information in the KT state, for example, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed with a probability of 67%.

The effect control means can execute an effect corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information in a predetermined effect mode in a special state. The predetermined effect mode is, for example, an effect mode for notifying that the player is in the small hit RUSH state. In the following, the predetermined effect mode may be referred to as a "small hit RUSH mode". The effects corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information include a small hit notification effect, a variable display of a decorative pattern, and a background image display. In the KT state, in most cases, the effect in the predetermined effect mode is executed.

When the special variable display corresponding to the control of the first advantageous state (10R probability variation jackpot) is executed as the variable display of the first identification information in the special state (KT state), the effect control means is the predetermined effect mode. With different special effect modes, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information. The special variable display is, for example, a variable display with a fluctuation time of 6 minutes.

The effect corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information in the special effect mode is an effect different from the effect corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information in the predetermined effect mode. Specifically, in the special effect mode, a small hit notification effect, a variation effect of a decorative pattern, a background image display, and the like, which are different from the predetermined effect mode, are performed.

In particular, in the special effect mode, an effect suggesting the remaining time of the special variable display is performed. The effect that suggests the remaining time of the special variable display is an effect that changes the area of the image in accordance with the remaining time. Specifically, the effect suggesting the remaining time of the special variable display is an effect in which the colored area of the background image changes. However, the effect of suggesting the remaining time of the special variable display may be an effect of changing the gauge, an effect of expressing the remaining time numerically, or the like. In the following, the special effect mode may be referred to as a "remaining time suggestion mode".

As described above, in the KT state, in most cases, the effect in the predetermined effect mode is executed. Here, in the KT state, it is difficult to win a prize in the first start winning opening, so there is little chance that the first identification information is variably displayed. Therefore, it is a fairly rare case that the special variable display corresponding to the control of the first advantageous state is executed as the variable display of the first identification information in the KT state. When such a rare case occurs, the predetermined effect mode is shifted to the special effect mode, and the effect in the special effect mode is executed. Therefore, it can be said that the production in the special production mode is a rare production.

(About the fluctuation effect of decoration identification information)
Here, the variation effect of the decoration identification information will be described. In the feature unit 013SH, the effect control means can execute the variable display of the decorative identification information in response to the variable display of the identification information. The decorative identification information is, for example, a decorative pattern. In the feature unit 013SH, the variation mode of the variable display of the decoration identification information is different between the predetermined effect mode and the special effect mode. The variation mode is different, for example, the display mode of the decorative pattern is the color, size, shape, numerical mode (Arabic numeral, Chinese numeral, Roman numeral, etc.) and variable mode (scrolling direction and speed) of the decorative symbol. , Rotate on the spot without scrolling, etc.).

(About the display of small symbols and the display of the number of holdings in the KT state)
Next, the display of the small symbol and the display of the number of holdings in the KT state will be described. In the feature unit 013SH, the effect control means can execute the variable display of the reduced decoration identification information (small symbol) corresponding to the variable display of the identification information (each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). Further, the effect control means can display the number of information related to the variable display as the reserved number. The display of the number of holds is a display of numbers, which is different from the hold display and the active display.

In the feature unit 013SH, the variable display of the reduced decoration identification information and the hold number display are displayed in a common display area regardless of the predetermined effect mode and the special effect mode, respectively. Both the variable display of the reduced decoration identification information and the hold number display are displayed in a fixed area toward the corner of the image display device 5, for example.

(About the predetermined production mode)
Next, the predetermined effect mode will be described. In the feature unit 013SH, the predetermined effect mode includes a first predetermined effect mode and a second predetermined effect mode different from the first predetermined effect mode. The first predetermined effect mode and the second predetermined effect mode are, for example, effect modes in which the variable display of the decoration identification information is different from each other. Specifically, for example, the first predetermined effect mode is an effect mode in which a decorative pattern is displayed and a variable effect is performed. On the other hand, the second predetermined effect mode is an effect mode in which a variable effect is performed without displaying a decorative pattern.

In the feature unit 013SH, the first predetermined effect mode and the second predetermined effect mode can be switched according to the operation of the player. The timing of switching is before the start of the predetermined effect mode, for example, during a big hit game.

The timing of switching is not limited to before the start of the predetermined effect mode, but may be after the start of the predetermined effect mode. When switching the predetermined effect mode after the start of the predetermined effect mode, an operation for switching the predetermined effect mode may be accepted during the execution of the predetermined effect mode. Further, the predetermined effect mode is not limited to including two types of effect modes, that is, a first predetermined effect mode and a second predetermined effect mode, and may include three or more types of effect modes.

(About the total number of acquisitions and the number of small hits in the KT state)
Next, the display of the total number of acquisitions and the display of the number of small hits in the KT state will be described. In the feature unit 013SH, the effect control means can display a first correspondence display corresponding to the given game value and a second correspondence display corresponding to the number of executions of the special state. The first correspondence display is, for example, a display of the total number of prize balls (total number of winnings) paid out during the consecutive villas. The second correspondence display is the number of executions of the small hit game executed after being controlled to the KT state.

In the feature unit 013SH, the first corresponding display and the second corresponding display are displayed in a common display mode regardless of the predetermined effect mode and the special effect mode, respectively. The common display mode is, for example, the same display mode.

(When variable display corresponding to the second advantageous state is executed in the KT state)
Next, a case where the variable display corresponding to the second advantageous state is executed in the KT state will be described. In the feature unit 013SH, the effect control means performs a predetermined effect when a predetermined variable display corresponding to the control of the second advantageous state (for example, 10R normal jackpot) is executed as the variable display of the first identification information in the special state. Depending on the mode, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information.

The predetermined variable display is, for example, a variable display having a fluctuation time (for example, 6 minutes) equivalent to that of the special variable display. The predetermined variable display may have a fluctuation time different from the fluctuation time of the special variable display. The effect control means sets the predetermined effect mode without shifting to the special effect mode when the 6-minute variable display corresponding to the control of the 10R normal jackpot is executed as the variable display of the first special symbol in the KT state. By continuing, it is possible to execute the effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol.

(About the transition effect to shift to the special effect mode)
Next, the transition effect for shifting to the special effect mode will be described. In the feature unit 013SH, the effect control means can execute the transition effect of shifting to the special effect mode when starting the effect in the special effect mode. The timing for executing the transition effect is, for example, the start of the special variable display. However, the timing of executing the transition effect is not limited to the start of the special variable display, and may be any timing after the start of the special variable display.

(About the fact that the acquisition of a predetermined number of balls is confirmed by the start of the special production mode)
Next, it will be described that the acquisition of a predetermined number of balls is confirmed by the start of the special effect mode. In the feature unit 013SH, the gaming state control means can be controlled to a specific state that is easily controlled to any one of a plurality of types of advantageous states after being controlled to the first advantageous state. The specific state is, for example, a probabilistic gaming state.

In the feature unit 013SH, by executing the effect in the special effect mode, the game value in the special state, the game value in the first advantageous state derived and displayed and controlled in the special variable display, or one of the specific states. It is confirmed that the game value due to the advantageous state is given. The game value (the number of prize balls in the KT state) in the special state is the fluctuation time of the special variable display of the first special symbol, the fluctuation time of the small hit fluctuation of the second special symbol in the KT state, and the execution time of the small hit game. Alternatively, the expected number of balls can be set according to the number of prize balls when the special variable winning ball device 17 is won in the small hit game. In the present embodiment, the game value in the special state is, for example, 1200 balls worth of balls.

In addition, the game value in the first advantageous state is 1200 balls worth of balls. The game value due to any advantageous state in the specific state is 1200 balls even in the case of the 10R normal jackpot with the lowest profit degree. That is, by executing the effect in the special effect mode, the acquisition of 3600 balls is confirmed.

(About the variable display effect mode in which the display result of the 2R probability variation jackpot is derived and displayed)
Next, a variable display effect mode in which the display result of the 2R probability variation jackpot is derived and displayed will be described. In the feature unit 013SH, the effect control means performs the effect by the special effect mode when the variable display corresponding to the control of the third advantageous state (2R probability variation jackpot) is executed as the variable display of the first identification information in the special state. Do not do. For example, when the variable display corresponding to the control of the 2R probability variation jackpot is executed, the predetermined effect mode is continued. Not limited to this, when the variable display corresponding to the control of the 2R probability variation jackpot is executed, the mode may be changed to an effect mode different from the predetermined effect mode or the special effect mode.

(About the music, the small hit notification effect, and the small hit winning sound in the KT state)
Next, the music, the small hit notification effect, and the small hit winning sound in the KT state will be described. In the feature unit 013SH, the effect control means can output a predetermined music. The predetermined music is a music such as BGM output in the second KT state. Further, as the effect control means, the first corresponding effect (for example, a small hit winning effect) corresponding to the control of the special state and the game medium in the special state win the variable winning means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 17). It is possible to execute a second corresponding effect (for example, a small hit winning sound) corresponding to the above.

The predetermined music is output regardless of the predetermined production mode and the special production mode. That is, the predetermined music is a music common to the predetermined production mode and the special production mode. Further, the first corresponding effect and the second corresponding effect are executed in different effect modes in the predetermined effect mode and the special effect mode, respectively. Specifically, for example, the small hit winning effect and the small hit winning sound may be executed in a more conspicuous manner in the special effect mode than in the predetermined effect mode.

(About the set value set for the pachinko game machine 1)
Next, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the feature unit 013SH, the setting means can be set to any one of a plurality of set values including the first set value and the second set value having different advantages for the player. There are six types of setting values, for example, setting values "1" to "6".

The jackpot winning probability varies depending on the set value. Specifically, the probability of winning a big hit is highest for "6" and decreases in the order of "5", "4", "3", "2", and "1" as the value decreases. That is, when the set value "6" is set, the advantage is highest for the player, and the values decrease in the order of "5", "4", "3", "2", and "1". Therefore, the advantage for the player is gradually lowered.

The first set value is a set value other than "6", for example, "1". The second set value is a set value other than "1", for example, "6". The set value is changed by the clerk operating the setting change button provided inside the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the feature unit 013SH, the effect control means can suggest a set value set in the setting means by at least one of the first corresponding effect and the second corresponding effect. The setting value is suggested by, for example, the type of the character displayed in the small hit winning effect, the background image type, the type of the winning sound in the second corresponding effect, and the like.

(About the jackpot production of the jackpot game that ends the special production mode)
Next, the jackpot effect of the jackpot game that ends the special effect mode will be described. In the feature unit 013SH, the effect control means can execute the predetermined advantageous effect in response to the control of the first advantageous state (10R probability variation jackpot) in the predetermined effect mode. The predetermined advantageous effect is, for example, a promotion effect in which the display result of the decorative symbol indicating the 10R normal jackpot is derived and displayed, and then the 10R probability variation jackpot is notified.

Further, in the feature unit 013SH, it is possible to execute a special advantageous effect different from the predetermined advantageous effect in response to the control of the first advantageous state in the special effect mode. The special advantageous effect is an effect of deriving and displaying the display result of the decorative pattern indicating the 10R probability variation jackpot and outputting a special moving image or sound. Further, the special advantageous production may be a production of a motif common to the production (character, music, etc.) in the special production mode.

(About feature part 014SH)
Next, the feature unit 014SH will be described as being different from the feature unit 013SH. In the feature unit 014SH, the variable display executing means interrupts the other variable display when a predetermined condition corresponding to the one variable display is satisfied, and restarts the other variable display after the interruption. The establishment of the predetermined condition is, for example, the stop of the big hit symbol or the stop of the small hit symbol. Specifically, the variable display executing means interrupts the variable display of the first special symbol when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, and after the interruption, the first special symbol Resume variable display.

In the feature unit 014SH, the information output means can output special information capable of specifying the remaining variable display time of the other variable display to the effect control means. The special information is the remaining fluctuation time specification command.

In the feature unit 014SH, the effect control means can execute the effect corresponding to the variable display time specified based on the special information. Specifically, the effect control means performs an effect of suggesting the remaining time as an effect corresponding to the variable display time in the special effect mode (remaining time suggestion mode). The effect suggesting the remaining time is, for example, an effect in which the background image changes according to the remaining time. Specifically, the effect in which the display area of the background image suggesting the remaining time decreases according to the remaining time. Is. The effect of suggesting the remaining time is not limited to such an effect, and may be an effect of counting down the remaining time. Further, the effect corresponding to the variable display time is not limited to the effect of suggesting the remaining time, and may be, for example, an effect of suggesting the elapsed time of the 6-minute variable display time.

(About the output timing of special information)
Next, the output timing of the special information will be described. In the feature unit 014SH, the information output means can output special information at a timing when the remaining variable display time of the other variable display (variable display of the first special symbol) becomes a predetermined time. The predetermined time is, for example, the timing of the remaining 1 second. The effect control means can perform a specific effect at the timing of the remaining 1 second. The specific effect is an effect of ending the special effect mode, for example, an effect of displaying an eye-catching image.

Further, in the feature unit 014SH, the information output means can output special information every time the variable display time of the other variable display (variable display of the first special symbol) elapses. The special time is, for example, 10 seconds. Therefore, the information output means outputs special information at intervals of 10 seconds.

Further, in the feature unit 014SH, the effect control means can execute a notification effect suggesting the remaining variable display time based on the special information. Specifically, the effect control means can perform an effect of changing the background image every 10 seconds in the remaining time suggestion mode.

(About the fluctuation pattern when special information is output)
Next, the fluctuation pattern when the special information is output will be described. In the feature unit 014SH, the information output means can output special information when the special variable display is executed as the variable display of the first identification information. Further, the information output means does not output special information when other variable displays other than the special variable display are executed as variable displays of the identification information (first special symbol and second special symbol). Therefore, the special information is output only when the special variable display of the first special symbol is executed.

(Regarding the jackpot probability, small hit probability, and loss probability of the first special symbol in the feature unit 013SH)
Next, the jackpot probability and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-4 and 10-5. FIG. 10-4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the jackpot probability, the small hit probability, and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the feature unit 013SH. FIG. 10-4 (A) shows the jackpot probability, the small hit probability, and the loss probability in the low probability state of the first special symbol. FIG. 10-4 (B) shows the jackpot probability, the small hit probability, and the loss probability in the high probability state of the first special symbol. The probabilities shown in FIGS. 10-4 (A) and 10-4 (B) are different from those shown in FIGS. 10-4 (A) and (B), and the denominator is expressed as "1".

(About jackpot probability)
In FIGS. 10-4 (A) and 10-4 (B), the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value. Specifically, the jackpot probability increases as the set value increases. As shown in FIG. 10-4 (A), in the low probability state, the jackpot probability is the lowest as "1/320" when the set value is "1". The jackpot probability increases as the set value increases, and is the highest at "1/264" when the set value is "6". Further, as shown in FIG. 10-4 (B), in the high probability state, the jackpot probability is about 10 times higher than in the low probability state. Regarding the jackpot probability, if the set value is "1", it is "1/32", and it becomes higher as the set value becomes higher, and when the set value is "6", it becomes higher. It is "1/26".

(About small hit probability)
As shown in FIGS. 10-4 (A) and 10-4 (B), the small hit probability is a constant probability "0" regardless of the gaming state or the set value. The small hit probability is not limited to the probability "0" and may be a low probability. However, when the display result indicating a small hit is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol is changed to the same variable display as in the case of loss, and the display result also shows loss. The display result may be derived and displayed. Further, in the small hit game state based on the variable display of the first special symbol, it is sufficient to prevent the winning of the special variable winning opening from being expected and to prevent the effect of notifying the small hit game state.

(About loss probability)
In FIGS. 10-4 (A) and 10-4 (B), the loss probability increases as the set value decreases. However, in both the low probability state and the high probability state, the loss probability is much higher than the big hit probability and the small hit probability. Therefore, the loss probability is almost constant regardless of the set value. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-4 (A), the loss probability in the low probability state is about "1 / 1.01" at any set value. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-4 (B), even in the high probability state, the loss probability is about "1 / 1.0." When the set value is "1" to "3", and is set. When the value is "4" to "6", it is about "1 / 1.04", which is almost the same.

(About the jackpot probability, small hit probability, and loss probability of the second special symbol)
FIG. 10-5 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the jackpot probability, the small hit probability, and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the feature unit 013SH. FIG. 10-5 (A) shows the jackpot probability, the small hit probability, and the loss probability in the low probability state of the second special symbol. FIG. 10-5 (B) shows the jackpot probability, the small hit probability, and the loss probability in the high probability state of the second special symbol. The probabilities shown in FIGS. 10-5 (A) and 10-5 (B) mainly have a small hit probability of "1 / 1.5" as compared with the probabilities shown in FIGS. 9-2 (A) and 9-2 (B). It is different in that.

(About jackpot probability)
In FIGS. 10-5 (A) and 10-5 (B), the jackpot probability is the same as the jackpot probability shown in FIGS. 10-4 (A) and 10-4 (B).

(About small hit probability)
As shown in FIGS. 10-5 (A) and 10-5 (B), the small hit probability has a constant probability of "1 / 1.5" regardless of the set value or the gaming state, for example, from the viewpoint of suppressing gambling. = 67%). From this small hit probability, even in the high base state (non-KT state), the display result indicating the small hit is frequently derived and displayed. However, if a small hit is won in the second special figure game in the non-KT state, the same effect as in the case of loss is performed. Specifically, the variable display of the decorative symbol is set to the same variable display as in the case of loss, and the display result indicating the loss is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the small hit game state based on the variable display of the second special symbol in the high base state, it is almost impossible to expect a prize in the special variable winning opening, so the effect of notifying the small hit game state is also performed. I can't.

(About loss probability)
In FIGS. 10-5 (A) and 10-5 (B), the loss probability increases as the set value decreases. For example, in the low probability state, the loss probability is much higher than the jackpot probability. Therefore, the loss probability is almost constant regardless of the set value. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-1 (A), the loss probability in the low probability state is about "1 / 3.03" regardless of the set value, and is almost unchanged. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-5 (B), the loss probability in the high probability state does not change so much depending on the set value.

(About the jackpot type judgment table in the feature unit 013SH)
FIG. 10-6 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a jackpot type determination table in the feature unit 013SH. In FIG. 10-6, (A) shows a jackpot type determination table when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. In FIG. 10-6, (B) shows a jackpot type determination table when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

(About the jackpot type judgment table for the 1st special symbol)
As shown in (A) of FIG. 10-6, the jackpot types when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed include 10R normal jackpot, 10R probability variation jackpot A, 10R probability variation jackpot B, and 2R probability variation jackpot. There are four types.

The 10R probability variation jackpot A is a jackpot for performing a promotion effect. The promotion effect is an effect of deriving and displaying the display result of the decorative symbol indicating the 10R normal jackpot, and then notifying that the 10R probability variation jackpot. That is, the 10 probability variation jackpot A is a jackpot in which the same effect as in the case of the 10R normal jackpot is performed at the start of the jackpot game, and then the 10R probability variation jackpot A is notified. The timing for notifying that the 10R probability variation jackpot A may be during the round game or during the ending period.

Here, each jackpot type will be described. A 10R normal jackpot is a jackpot that allows you to get 10R worth of balls. Further, after the big hit game of 10R normal big hit, the game state is controlled to the low probability / high base state. The 10R probability variation jackpot A and the 10R probability variation jackpot B are both jackpots that can obtain 10R worth of balls. Further, after the jackpot game of the 10R probability variation jackpot A and the 10R probability variation jackpot B, the gaming state is controlled to a high probability / high base state. Although the details will be described later, when the 10R probability variation jackpot A and the 10R probability variation jackpot B are won in the variable display of the first special symbol in the KT state, the production is performed in different production modes. The 2R probability variation jackpot is a jackpot that allows you to get 2R worth of balls. Further, after the big hit game of the 2R probability variation big hit, the game state is controlled to the KT state (high probability / low base state).

By using the jackpot type determination table of FIG. 10-6 (A), any one of these four types of jackpots is determined. The variable display of the first special symbol is mainly performed when the normal state or the high base state is controlled. Therefore, in the normal state or the high base state, it is basically determined to be one of these four types of big hits.

(About the jackpot type judgment table for the second special symbol)
As shown in FIG. 10-6 (B), the jackpot types when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed include 10 normal jackpots as in the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol. There are four types: 10R probability variation jackpot A, 10R probability variation jackpot B, and 2R probability variation jackpot B. By using the jackpot type determination table of FIG. 10-6 (B), any one of these four types is determined. The variable display of the second special symbol is mainly performed when the KT state is controlled. That is, in the KT state, it is basically determined to be one of these four types of jackpots.

In any of the jackpot type determination tables shown in FIGS. 10-6 (A) and (B), the rate at which each jackpot type is determined is constant regardless of the set value. Further, the probability that each jackpot type is determined is common between the jackpot type determination table (A) and the jackpot type determination table (B). Specifically, for example, in (A) and (B), the 10R normal jackpot is determined with a probability of 35%, the 10R probability variation jackpot A is determined with a probability of 8%, and the 10R probability variation jackpot B is 27%. It is determined by probability, and the 2R probability variation jackpot is determined with a probability of 30%.

The jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol may be easier to determine the jackpot type that is advantageous to the player than the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. For example, in the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol, a 6R probability variation jackpot may be taken instead of the 10R probability variation jackpot A. By doing so, the KT state can be made more advantageous than the other gaming states, and the interest in the KT state can be improved.

(Example of variation pattern table used in feature unit 013SH)
Next, an example of the fluctuation pattern table will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-7 and 10-8. FIG. 10-7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table for the first special symbol in the feature unit 013SH. As shown in FIGS. 10-7 (A) to 10-7, each fluctuation pattern table includes EXT, fluctuation pattern name, fluctuation content, and fluctuation time.

In each fluctuation pattern table shown in FIGS. 10-7 (A) to (C), a fluctuation pattern in which the loss display result is derived and displayed and a fluctuation pattern in which the jackpot display result is derived and displayed are stored. However, the fluctuation pattern in which the display result of the small hit is derived and displayed is not stored. This is because the feature unit 013SH does not make a small hit based on the variable display of the first special symbol.

FIG. 10-7 (A) is a variation pattern table for the first special symbol used in the low probability / low base state among the non-KT states. FIG. 10-7 (B) is a variation pattern table for the first special symbol used in the low probability / high base state and the high probability / high base state among the non-KT states.

FIG. 10-7 (C) is a variation pattern table for the first special symbol used in the KT state (high probability / low base state). In FIG. 10-7 (C), when a display result indicating a big hit is derived and displayed, a 6-minute fluctuation pattern (first fluctuation pattern # 60) is selected. As a result, in the KT state, when a big hit is made based on the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed until 6 minutes have passed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. It will be possible. Therefore, the small hit game based on the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed.

Further, in FIG. 10-7 (C), when the display result indicating the loss is derived and displayed, the variation pattern of 2 seconds (first variation pattern # 59) is selected. The fluctuation time of the first fluctuation pattern # 59 is 0.5 seconds. As a result, in the KT state, the variable display of the first special symbol can be quickly ended, so that the game can be advanced centering on the variable display of the second special symbol.

FIG. 10-8 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table for the second special symbol in the feature unit 013SH. As shown in FIGS. 10-8 (A) to 10-8, each fluctuation pattern table includes EXT, fluctuation pattern name, fluctuation content, and fluctuation time.

In each fluctuation pattern table shown in FIGS. 10-8 (A) and (B), the fluctuation pattern in which the loss display result is derived and displayed, the fluctuation pattern in which the small hit display result is derived and displayed, and the jackpot display result are displayed. The fluctuation pattern that is derived and displayed is stored.

FIG. 10-8 (A) is a variation pattern table for the second special symbol used in the non-KT state (low probability / low base state, high probability / high base state, low probability / high base state). As shown in FIG. 10-8 (A), in the non-KT state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is long. Therefore, in the non-KT state, the game is mainly advanced by the variable display of the first special symbol.

FIG. 10-8 (B) is a variation pattern table for the second special symbol used in the KT state (high probability / low base state). As shown in FIG. 10-8 (B), in the KT state, when the loss display result is derived and displayed, the shortened fluctuation of 1.5 seconds (second fluctuation pattern # 64) and the shortened fluctuation of 3 seconds (second fluctuation) One of the normal variations of pattern # 65) is determined.

As shown in FIG. 10-8 (B), in the KT state, when the display result of the small hit is derived and displayed, the shortened fluctuation of 1.5 seconds (second fluctuation pattern # 66) and the shortened fluctuation of 3 seconds (second fluctuation pattern # 66) are performed. One of the normal fluctuations of the fluctuation pattern # 67) is determined.

Further, in the KT state, when the jackpot display result is derived and displayed, 2 minutes (second fluctuation pattern # 68) is determined. In the KT state, the variation pattern of reach loss is not stored. Therefore, in the KT state, when the reach effect is performed, the big hit is confirmed.

(Direction control command)
FIG. 10-9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect control command (residual fluctuation time designation command). Each command shown in FIG. 10-9 is a command transmitted from the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). Specifically, it is a command transmitted during the jackpot fluctuation (during 6-minute fluctuation) of the first special symbol in the KT state. In FIG. 10-9, the 35 types of commands shown in commands B001 to B034 are commands that are transmitted every 10 seconds.

As an example, the residual fluctuation time designation command A1 is a command for designating that the residual fluctuation time is 5 minutes and 50 seconds. Such residual fluctuation time designation commands A1 to A34 are sequentially transmitted every 10 seconds during the jackpot fluctuation (during the 6-minute fluctuation) of the first special symbol. That is, the remaining fluctuation time designation command is transmitted 35 times during the 6-minute variable display. By receiving the remaining fluctuation time designation commands A1 to A34, the effect control CPU 120 has an effect that changes every 10 seconds until 350 seconds (= 5 minutes and 50 seconds) elapse (an effect that suggests the remaining time). ) Can be performed.

In FIG. 10-9, the command B101 is a command transmitted in the last 1 second of the jackpot fluctuation (6 minute fluctuation) of the first special symbol in the KT state. Specifically, the residual fluctuation time designation command B1 is a command for designating that the residual fluctuation time is 1 second. By receiving the remaining fluctuation time designation command B1, the effect control CPU 120 can perform an effect of ending the remaining time suggestion mode.

(First special symbol normal processing in feature unit 013SH)
FIG. 10-10 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process process of the feature unit 013SH. The state in which the first special symbol normal processing is executed is when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A. The case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A is a state in which the first special symbol display device 4A does not display the variation of the first special symbol.

In the first special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120). It is determined whether or not (step 013SHS1000A).

The value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) when the variable display of the special symbol can be executed. Specifically, it is a big hit. This is a case where neither the game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). More specifically, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121). ) ~ It is a case where the value does not indicate the small hit end process (step S128).

When the value of the accessory control process flag is not a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step 013SHS1000A: NO), that is, when it is impossible to execute the variable display of the special symbol, the game control microcomputer 100 , Ends the process as it is.

On the other hand, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step 013SHS1000A: YES), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step 013SHS1000A: YES). Step 013SHS1001A). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the count value of the first hold storage number counter. When the first reserved storage number is "0" (step 013SHS1001A: YES), the first customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 013SHS1002A), and a series of processes is terminated.

When the first reserved storage number is not "0" (step 013SHS1001A: NO), the game control microcomputer 100 is stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. The random number value is read out and stored in the first random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 013SHS1003A).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 reduces the value of the first reserved storage number by "1" (subtracts the count value of the first reserved storage number counter by "1") and shifts the contents of each storage area. (Step 013SHS1004A). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 sets each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. As a result, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first hold storage is extracted matches the digestion order (orders 1 to 4) of each first hold storage. It has become. Similarly, for the second reserved memory, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved memory is extracted and the order in which each second reserved memory is digested (1 to 4). The order of) and is matched.

After step 013SHS1003A, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a set value command indicating a set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 013SHS1005A). The set value command is transmitted not only at the timing when the variable display is started, but also at the execution timing of the setting change process (process for changing the set value) at the time of turning on the power. Further, the timing at which the set value command is transmitted is not limited to the timing at which the variation display is started, and may be the end timing of the variation display or a predetermined timing during the variation display.

After step 013SHS1005A, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 013SHS1006A). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command with reference to the probability variation flag and the high base flag.

More specifically, the game control microcomputer 100 determines that the probability / low base state is low when both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are off, and specifies the low probability / low base background. Send a command. Further, when the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on, the game control microcomputer 100 determines that it is in a low probability / high base state and issues a low probability / high base background designation command. Send. If both the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is on, it is determined that the probability / high base state is high, and the high probability / high base background specification command is transmitted. Further, when the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off, the game control microcomputer 100 determines that it is in the KT state (high probability / low base state) and transmits a KT background designation command. To do.

After step 013SHS1006A, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the second special symbol is in progress (step 013SHS1007A). Specifically, when the second jackpot flag indicating that the game control microcomputer 100 is a jackpot based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is set, the jackpot of the second special symbol is changing. Is determined to be.

When it is determined that the jackpot variation of the second special symbol is in progress (step 013SHS1007A: YES), the game control microcomputer 100 shifts to step 013SHS1014A. That is, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, the game control microcomputer 100 is forced when the jackpot determination value is stored in the first hold storage. It will be lost. In addition, in order to forcibly make a loss, a random number value (fixed value) of the loss may be set as a random number for hit determination.

In step 013SHS1007A, when the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is not in progress (step 013SHS1007A: NO), the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the first random number storage buffer (step 013SHS1008A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the jackpot determination module (step 013SHS1009A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines to be a jackpot when the hit determination random number matches a predetermined jackpot determination value.

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not to make a big hit as a result of the big hit determination (step 013SHS1010A). In step 013SHS1010A, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not to make a big hit by using either the low-probability jackpot determination table or the high-probability jackpot determination table in consideration of the game state. .. As a result of the jackpot determination, if the jackpot is not obtained (step 013SHS1010A: NO), the game control microcomputer 100 shifts to step 013SHS1014A.

On the other hand, when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit (step 013SHS1010A: YES), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is obtained based on the variation display of the first special symbol. (Step 013SHS1011A). Then, based on the random number for determining the hit type, it is determined which of the 10R normal jackpot, the 10R probability variation jackpot A, the 10R probability variation jackpot B, and the 2R probability variation jackpot is the jackpot type (step 013SHS1012A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 stores the determined jackpot type (step 013SHS1013A), and shifts to step 013SHS1017A.

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 013SHS1014A). The small hit determination module is a program that determines to make a small hit when a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination) matches a predetermined small hit determination value.

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not to make a small hit (step 013SHS1015A), and if it does not make a small hit (step 013SHS1015A: NO), the process proceeds to step 013SHS1017A.

On the other hand, in the case of making a small hit (step 013SHS1015A: YES), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step). 013SHS1016A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high-base number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the high-base state is "0" (step 013SHS1017A). When the value of the high base number counter is "0" (step 013SHS1017A: YES), the game control microcomputer 100 shifts to step 013SHS1023A.

When the value of the high base count counter is not "0" (step 013SHS1017A: NO), that is, in the low probability / high base state, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the value of the high base count counter to "1". Subtract (step 013SHS1018A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter has become "0" (step 013SHS1019A).

When the value of the high base number counter is not "0" (step 013SHS1019A: NO), the game control microcomputer 100 shifts to step 013SHS1023A. When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0" (step 013SHS1019A: YES), the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state (step 013SHS1020A).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the special figure time reduction flag indicating that the reduction control of the variation display of the special symbol is in progress (step 013SHS1021A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed display 26 is extended until the end of the fluctuation (step 013SHS1022A).

In the feature unit 013SH, the high base flag is set, and the number of times the variation display is executed in the high base state (high base number counter) is controlled to the low probability / high base state (time saving state). It's time. When controlled to the low probability / high base state, the transition to the low probability / low base state (normal state) is performed when the 50th variation display is started. Specifically, it is determined as YES in step 013SHS1019A, the high base flag is reset in step 013SHS1020A, and the special figure time reduction flag is also reset in step 013SHS1021A, whereby the low probability / low base state (normal state). Will move to.

The lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is for continuing the right-handed notification and continuing the right-handed state, and although the high base state has ended as the game state, the fluctuation common to the high base state. It is a flag to make it a common production background with the high base state while keeping it in the shortened state.

In this example, the final fluctuation in the high base state (in this example, the 50th fluctuation display) may be a fluctuation display of the first special symbol or a fluctuation display of the second special symbol. .. When the final fluctuation of the high base state (in this example, the 50th fluctuation display) is started, the lighting extension flag (state extension) is performed by the processing of step 013SHS1022A and the processing of step 013SHS1024B (FIG. 10-14) described later. Flag) is set and the fluctuation shortening state is extended. The timing for resetting the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is the end of the 50th variation display, but it may be the start of the 51st variation display.

After step 013SHS1022A, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step 013SHS1023A), and ends a series of processes. Although not shown, the symbol to be derived and displayed in the current variation display is determined immediately before step 013SHS1023A.

By the above-described processing, when starting the variable display of the first special symbol, it is possible to perform a jackpot determination for the first reserved memory, a transition of the gaming state from the high base state to the low base state, and the like.

(First fluctuation pattern setting process in feature unit 013SH)
FIG. 10-11 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first special symbol process process of the feature unit 013SH. In the first variation pattern setting process, first, whether or not the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is set with the special figure time reduction flag indicating that the variation display of the special symbol is being shortened. (Step 013SHS1100A).

When the special figure time reduction flag is set (step 013SHS1100A: YES), that is, in the low probability / high base state or the high probability / high base state, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the fluctuation pattern. As the variation pattern table of the above, the variation pattern table for the first special symbol for high base shown in FIG. 10-7 (B) is selected (step 013SHS1101A).

When the special figure time reduction flag is not set (step 013SHS1100A: NO), the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 013SHS1102A). When the probability variation flag is set (step 013SHS1102A: YES), that is, when the probability variation state is controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 uses the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern as shown in FIG. 10-. The first special symbol variation pattern table for KT shown in 7 (C) is selected (step 013SHS1103A).

When the probability variation flag is not set (step 013SHS1102A: NO), that is, when the probability variation state is controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 uses FIG. 10- as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. The first special symbol variation pattern table for low probability / low base shown in 7 (A) is selected (step 013SHS1104A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 selects a variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer from the variation pattern tables determined in steps 013SHS1101A, S1103A, and S1104A. Determine (step 013SHS1105A). The fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined by the fluctuation pattern.

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined fluctuation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 013SHS1106A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation pattern in the first fluctuation time timer, and starts the measurement of the fluctuation time (step 013SHS1107A).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the variation pattern determined in step 013SHS1105A is the first variation pattern # 60 (6 minute variation) (step 013SHS1108A). If the variation pattern determined in step 013SHS1105A is not the first variation pattern # 60 (6 minute variation) (step 013SHS1108A: NO), the game control microcomputer 100 proceeds to step 013SHS1110A.

When the fluctuation pattern determined in step 013SHS1105A is the first fluctuation pattern # 60 (6 minute fluctuation) (step 013SHS1108A: YES), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a 10-second timer for measuring the passage of 10 seconds. Set and start the measurement for 10 seconds (step 013SHS1109A).

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 causes the first special symbol display device 4A to start the variable display of the first special symbol (step 013SHS1110A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process (step 013SHS1111A), and ends a series of processes.

By the above-mentioned processing, when starting the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation pattern is determined according to the game state, the timer for ending the variation display is set, and the variable display for 6 minutes is performed every 10 seconds. It is possible to set a timer for measuring the timing of.

(First special symbol variation processing in feature unit 013SH)
10-12 and 10-13 are flowcharts showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process of the feature unit 013SH. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 013SHS1200A).

In addition, when the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120), the small hit game is in progress even during the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times). This is the case when the special variable winning ball device 17 is not open). More specifically, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121). This is a case where the value does not indicate the small hit end process (step S128).

When the value of the accessory control process flag is not a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step 013SHS1200A: NO), the game control microcomputer 100 ends the process as it is.

When the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step 013SHS1200A: YES), the game control microcomputer 100 still transmits the display result designation command to the effect control CPU 120. If not, it is transmitted (step 013SHS1201A). The display result specification command is determined based on the determination result of whether or not to make a big hit and the determination result of the big hit type. Specifically, the display result designation command is a command indicating any one of loss, 10R normal jackpot, 10R probability variation jackpot A, 10R probability variation jackpot B, 2R probability variation jackpot, and small hit.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the first variation time timer (step 013SHS1202A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the first fluctuation time timer has timed out (step 013SHS1203A). When the first fluctuation time timer times out (step 013SHS1203A: YES), the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the first symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 013SHS1204A), and proceeds to step 013SHS1207.

When the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out (step 013SHS1203A: NO), the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 013SHS1205A). ).

The determination that the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B indicates, for example, that the jackpot is based on the value of the second special symbol process flag and the variable display of the second special symbol. It is performed based on the presence or absence of the second jackpot flag set. Specifically, when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing and the second jackpot flag is set, the game control microcomputer 100 is the first. 2 It is determined that the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the special symbol display device 4B.

When the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 013SHS1205A: YES), the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120. (Step 013SHS1206A).

In this case, if the first big hit flag or the first small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the first big hit flag or the first small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 013SHS1207A), and ends a series of processes.

(About Fig. 10-13)
In step 013SHS1205A, when the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 013SHS1205A: NO), the game control microcomputer 100 is measuring the 10-second timer (during 6-minute variable display). (Step 013SHS1301A). The 10-second timer is measured during the variable display of the first fluctuation pattern # 60 (during the variable display of 6 minutes) (see step 013SHS1109A in FIG. 10-11).

When the measurement of the 10-second timer is in progress (step 013SHS1301A: YES), the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the 10-second timer (step 013SHS1302A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the first fluctuation time timer has timed out (step 013SHS1303A).

If the 10-second timer has not timed out (step 013SHS1303A: NO), the game control microcomputer 100 ends the series of processes as it is. If the 10-second timer times out (step 013SHS1303A: YES), the game control microcomputer 100 resets the 10-second timer (step 013SHS1304A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 adds "1" to the set number of 10 timers (step 013SHS1305A).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the number of times of setting the 10-second timer is 35 times (last 10 seconds) (step 013SHS1306A). If the number of times the 10-second timer is set is not 35 (step 013SHS1306A: NO), the game control microcomputer 100 shifts to step 013SHS1309A. When the number of times the 10-second timer is set is 35 (step 013SHS1306A: YES), the number of times the 10-second timer is set is reset (step 013SHS1307A).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a 9-second timer for specifying the timing of the last 1 second in the 6-minute variable display (step 013SHS1308A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a residual fluctuation time designation command A (a command of any of the residual fluctuation time designation commands A1 to A34 indicating the elapse of 10 seconds: see FIG. 10-9) to the effect control CPU 120. (Step 013SHS1310A), and the series of processes is completed.

In step 013SHS1301A, when the 10-second timer is not being measured (step 013SHS1301A: NO), the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the 9-second timer is being measured (step 013SHS1310A). When the 9-second timer is not being measured (step 013SHS1310A: NO), the game control microcomputer 100 ends a series of processes.

When the 9-second timer is being measured (step 013SHS1310A: YES), the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts “1” from the 9-second timer (step 013SHS1311A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the 9-second timer has timed out (step 013SHS1312A).

If the 9-second timer has not timed out (step 013SHS1312A: NO), the game control microcomputer 100 ends the series of processes as it is. When the 9-second timer times out (step 013SHS1303A: YES), the game control microcomputer 100 sends the effect control CPU 120 to the remaining variation time designation command B1 (the remaining variation time of the 6-minute variable display is 1 second). A command indicating that (see FIG. 10-9) is transmitted (step 013SHS1313A), and a series of processes is completed.

Here, in the first special symbol variation processing shown in FIGS. 10-12 and 10-13, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol (particularly during the 6-minute variation). When is a small hit, the first special symbol change processing is terminated as it is. That is, each timer is not updated (subtracted). This will be specifically described. When the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing (step S126), and the state shifts to the small hit gaming state. To do.

As a result, the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the small hit opening pre-processing (step S126), a value indicating the small hit opening processing (step S127), and a value indicating the small hit end processing (step S128). It becomes one of the values. Therefore, in step 013SHS1200A, it is determined to be NO after the next timer interrupt (first special symbol variation processing). Therefore, since each process shown in FIGS. 10-12 and 10-13 is skipped, each timer is not updated. Specifically, the update of each timer is the update of the first fluctuation time timer in step 013SHS1202A, the update of the 10-second timer in step 013SHS1302A, and the update of the 9-second timer in step 013SHS1311A.

That is, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol, the update of the timer of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game. Then, when the small hit game based on the variable display of the second special symbol is completed, that is, when the value of the bonus control process flag is updated to the value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120) again, each timer The update will be resumed.

By the above-described processing, it is possible to interrupt the update of the timer of the first special symbol during the small hit game or the big hit game based on the variable display of the second special symbol. Further, by the above-mentioned processing, the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the timing of every 10 seconds in the special variable display (6 minutes), and the last 1 second in the special variable display (6 minutes) are obtained. The timing can be specified. In addition, a command can be sent at a specified timing.

(Second special symbol normal processing in feature unit 013SH)
FIG. 10-14 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal processing in the second special symbol process processing of the feature unit 013SH. The state in which the second special symbol normal processing is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing. When the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing, it means that the second special symbol display device 4B does not display the variation of the second special symbol. ..

In the second special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120). It is determined whether or not (step 013SHS1000B).

The value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) when the variable display of the special symbol can be executed. Specifically, it is a big hit. This is a case where neither the game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). More specifically, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121). ) ~ It is a case where the value does not indicate the small hit end process (step S128).

When the value of the accessory control process flag is not a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step 013SHS1000B: NO), that is, when it is impossible to execute the variable display of the special symbol, the game control microcomputer 100 , Ends the process as it is.

On the other hand, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step 013SHS1000B: YES), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step 013SHS1000B: YES). Step 013SHS1001B). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the count value of the second reserved storage counter. When the second reserved storage number is "0" (step 013SHS1001B: YES), the second customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 013SHS1002B), and a series of processes is terminated.

When the first reserved storage number is not "0" (step 013SHS1001B: NO), the game control microcomputer 100 is stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. The random number value is read out and stored in the second random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 013SHS1003B).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 reduces the value of the second reserved storage number by "1" (subtracts the count value of the second reserved storage number counter by "1") and shifts the contents of each storage area. (Step 013SHS1004B). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 sets each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1. As a result, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved storage is extracted matches the digestion order (orders 1 to 4) of each second reserved storage. It has become.

After step 013SHS1003B, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a set value command indicating a set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 013SHS1005B). The set value command is transmitted not only at the timing when the variable display is started, but also at the execution timing of the setting change process (process for changing the set value) at the time of turning on the power.

After step 013SHS1005B, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 013SHS1006B). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command with reference to the probability variation flag and the high base flag.

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress (step 013SHS1007B). Specifically, when the first jackpot flag indicating that the game control microcomputer 100 is a jackpot based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is set, the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress. Is determined to be.

When it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress (step 013SHS1007B: YES), the game control microcomputer 100 shifts to step 013SHS1014B. That is, when the change of the second special symbol is started during the change of the big hit of the first special symbol, the game control microcomputer 100 is forced when the big hit determination value is stored in the second hold memory. It will be lost. In addition, in order to forcibly make a loss, a random number value (fixed value) of the loss may be set as a random number for hit determination.

In step 013SHS1007B, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is not in progress (step 013SHS1007B: NO), the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the second random number storage buffer (step 013SHS1008B). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the jackpot determination module (step 013SHS1009B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines to be a jackpot when the hit determination random number matches a predetermined jackpot determination value.

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not to make a big hit as a result of the big hit determination (step 013SHS1010B). In step 013SHS1010B, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not to make a big hit by using either the low probability big hit determination table or the high probability big hit determination table in consideration of the game state. .. As a result of the jackpot determination, if no jackpot is obtained (step 013SHS1010B: NO), the game control microcomputer 100 shifts to step 013SHS1014B.

On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot (step 013SHS1010B: YES), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second jackpot flag indicating that the jackpot is a jackpot based on the variation display of the second special symbol. (Step 013SHS1011B). Then, based on the random number for determining the hit type, it is determined which of the 10R normal jackpot, the 10R probability variation jackpot A, the 10R probability variation jackpot B, and the 2R probability variation jackpot is the jackpot type (step 013SHS1012B). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 stores the determined jackpot type (step 013SHS1013B), and shifts to step 013SHS1017B.

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 013SHS1014B). The small hit determination module is a program that determines to make a small hit when a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination) matches a predetermined small hit determination value.

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not to make a small hit (step 013SHS1015B), and if it does not make a small hit (step 013SHS1015B: NO), the process proceeds to step 013SHS1017B.

On the other hand, in the case of making a small hit (step 013SHS1015B: YES), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step). 013SHS1016B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high-base number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the high-base state is "0" (step 013SHS1017B). When the value of the high base number counter is "0" (step 013SHS1017B: YES), the game control microcomputer 100 shifts to step 013SHS1023B.

When the value of the high base count counter is not "0" (step 013SHS1017B: NO), that is, in the low probability / high base state, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the value of the high base count counter to "1". Subtract (step 013SHS1018B). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter has become "0" (step 013SHS1019B).

When the value of the high base number counter is not "0" (step 013SHS1019B: NO), the game control microcomputer 100 shifts to step 013SHS1023B. When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0" (step 013SHS1019B: YES), the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state (step 013SHS1020B).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the special figure time reduction flag indicating that the reduction control of the variation display of the special symbol is in progress (step 013SHS1021B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed display 26 is extended until the end of the fluctuation (step 013SHS1022B).

In the feature unit 013SH, the high base flag is set, and the number of times the variation display is executed in the high base state (high base number counter) is controlled to the low probability / high base state (time saving state). It's time. When controlled to the low probability / high base state, the transition to the low probability / low base state (normal state) is performed when the 50th variation display is started. Specifically, it is determined as YES in step 013SHS1019B, the high base flag is reset in step 013SHS1020B, and the special figure time reduction flag is also reset in step 013SHS1021B, so that the low probability / low base state (normal state). Will move to.

The lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is for continuing the right-handed notification and continuing the right-handed state, and although the high base state has ended as the game state, the fluctuation common to the high base state. It is a flag to make it a common production background with the high base state while keeping it in the shortened state.

In this example, the final fluctuation in the high base state (in this example, the 50th fluctuation display) may be a fluctuation display of the first special symbol or a fluctuation display of the second special symbol. .. When the final fluctuation of the high base state (in this example, the 50th fluctuation display) is started, the lighting extension flag (state extension) is performed by the processing of step 013SHS1022B and the processing of step 013SHS1024B (FIG. 10-14) described later. Flag) is set and the fluctuation shortening state is extended. The timing for resetting the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is the end of the 50th variation display, but it may be the start of the 51st variation display.

After step 013SHS1022B, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step 013SHS1023B), and ends a series of processes. Although not shown, the symbol to be derived and displayed in the current variation display is determined immediately before step 013SHS1023B.

By the above-described processing, when starting the variable display of the second special symbol, it is possible to perform a jackpot determination for the second reserved memory, a transition of the gaming state from the high base state to the low base state, and the like.

Further, when the jackpot fluctuation (6-minute fluctuation: special variable display) of the first special symbol in which the display result of the 10R probability variation jackpot B is derived and displayed is performed (step 013SHS1007B: YES), the jackpot determination is not performed. On the other hand, a small hit determination is performed (step 013SHS1014B). For this reason, it is possible for the player to obtain a ball by a small hit game while the special variable display is fluctuating.

(About the second fluctuation pattern setting process)
Although not shown, the second variation pattern setting process will be described below. The second variation pattern setting process is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) shown in FIG. 10-11, in that the type of the variation pattern table to be selected is different and the setting of the 10-second timer is set. The difference is that it is not done.

First, the points that the types of the variation pattern table to be selected are different will be described. In the second variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern table is selected depending on whether or not it is in the KT state. Whether or not it is in the KT state is determined by referring to the special figure time saving flag and the probability change flag. Specifically, when both the conditions that the special figure time reduction flag is not set and the probability variation flag is set are satisfied, it is determined that the state is KT, and both conditions are satisfied. If not, it is determined to be in a non-KT state.

In the selection of the second variation pattern, when the game control microcomputer 100 determines that it is in the non-KT state, the non-variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-8 (A) is used as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. Select the second special symbol variation pattern table for KT. Further, when the game control microcomputer 100 determines that it is in the non-KT state, the second special for KT shown in FIG. 10-8 (B) is used as a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern. Select the variable pattern table for symbols.

Explaining that the 10-second timer is not set, the game control microcomputer 100 does not perform the process corresponding to steps 013SHS1108A and S1109A shown in FIG. 10-11.

The second variation pattern setting process is the same process as the process in which "first" is replaced with "second" in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 10-11, except for these two differences. can do.

By the second variation pattern setting process, when starting the variation display of the second special symbol, it is possible to determine the variation pattern according to the game state, set the timer for ending the variation display, and the like.

(Second special symbol variation processing in feature unit 013SH)
FIG. 10-15 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process in the second special symbol process process of the feature unit 013SH. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 013SHS1200B).

In addition, when the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120), the small hit game is in progress even during the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times). This is the case when the special variable winning ball device 17 is not open). More specifically, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121). This is a case where the value does not indicate the small hit end process (step S128).

When the value of the accessory control process flag is not a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step 013SHS1200B: NO), the game control microcomputer 100 ends the process as it is.

When the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step 013SHS1200B: YES), the game control microcomputer 100 still transmits the display result designation command to the effect control CPU 120. If not, it is transmitted (step 013SHS1201B). The display result specification command is determined based on the determination result of whether or not to make a big hit and the determination result of the big hit type. Specifically, the display result designation command is a command indicating any one of loss, 10R normal jackpot, 10R probability variation jackpot A, 10R probability variation jackpot B, 2R probability variation jackpot, and small hit.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the second fluctuation time timer (step 013SHS1202B). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the second variation time timer has timed out (step 013SHS1203B). When the second fluctuation time timer times out (step 013SHS1203B: YES), the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a second symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 013SHS1204B), and proceeds to step 013SHS1207.

When the second fluctuation time timer has not timed out (step 013SHS1203B: NO), the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 013SHS1205B). ).

The determination that the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A indicates, for example, that the jackpot is based on the value of the first special symbol process flag and the variable display of the first special symbol. It is performed based on whether or not the first jackpot flag is set. Specifically, when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing and the first jackpot flag is set, the game control microcomputer 100 is the first. 1 It is determined that the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the special symbol display device 4A.

When the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 013SHS1205B: YES), the game control microcomputer 100 controls to send the second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120. (Step 013SHS1206B).

In this case, if the second big hit flag or the second small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the second big hit flag or the second small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step 013SHS1207B), and ends the series of processes.

By the above-described processing, it is possible to interrupt the update of the timer of the second special symbol during the small hit game or the big hit game based on the variable display of the first special symbol. In the variable display of the second special symbol, the timing of every 10 seconds in the special variable display (6 minutes) and the timing of the last 1 second in the special variable display (6 minutes) are not specified. Also, no command is sent at these timings.

(Production mode setting process in feature unit 013SH)
FIG. 10-16 is a flowchart showing an effect mode setting process in the effect control process process of the feature unit 013SH. The effect mode setting process is, for example, a process included in the ending effect process (step S177).

In the effect mode setting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot end designation command has been received (step 013SHS1601). If the jackpot end designation command has not been received (step 013SHS1601: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the effect mode setting process as it is. When the jackpot end designation command is received (step 013SHS1601: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the 2R probability variation jackpot has ended (step 013SHS1602). In step 013SHS1602, the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of jackpot to end by referring to the second special symbol in the stop display.

When the effect control CPU 120 determines that the 2R probability variation jackpot has ended (step 013SHS1602: YES), the effect mode reception process is performed (step 013SHS1603). The effect mode reception process is a process of accepting the selection of one of the small hit RUSH mode A and the small hit RUSH mode B. The small hit RUSH mode A and the small hit RUSH mode B are both effect modes executed when controlled to the KT state (high probability / low base state). The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the small hit RUSH mode A has been accepted in the effect mode reception process (step 013SHS1604).

When the small hit RUSH mode A is accepted (step 013SHS1604: YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit RUSH mode A (step 013SHS1605) and ends a series of processes. On the other hand, when the small hit RUSH mode B is accepted (step 013SHS1604: NO), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit RUSH mode B (step 013SHS1606) and ends a series of processes.

In step 013SHS1602, when it is determined that the effect control CPU 120 is not the end of the 2R probability variation jackpot (step 013SHS1602: NO), it is determined whether or not it is the end of the 10R probability variation jackpot (step 013SHS1607). When the effect control CPU 120 determines that the 10R probability variation jackpot has ended (step 013SHS1607: YES), the probability variation mode is set (step 013SHS1608), and a series of processes is terminated. The probability variation mode is an effect mode executed when the probability variation state (high probability / high base state) is controlled.

In step 013SHS1607, when it is determined that the effect control CPU 120 is not the end of the 10R probability variation jackpot (step 013SHS1607: NO), that is, when it is determined that the 10R normal jackpot is finished, the time saving mode is set (step 013SHS1609). ), Ends a series of processes. The time saving mode is an effect mode executed when the time saving state (low probability / high base state) is controlled.

(Remaining time suggestion mode start processing in feature unit 013SH)
FIG. 10-17 is a flowchart showing the remaining time suggestion mode start process in the effect control process process of the feature unit 013SH. The remaining time suggestion mode start process is, for example, a process included in the variable display start wait process (step S170).

In the remaining time suggestion mode start process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern command of the first variation pattern # 60 (6 minute variation) is received (step 013SHS1701). The first fluctuation pattern # 60 is a fluctuation pattern when the display result of the 10R probability variation jackpot B is derived and displayed based on the variable display of the first special symbol in the KT state.

When the variation pattern command of the first variation pattern # 60 (6 minute variation) is not received (step 013SHS1701: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is. When the variation pattern command of the first variation pattern # 60 (6 minute variation) is received (step 013SHS1701: YES), the effect control CPU 120 has a jackpot of 10R executed based on the variable display of the first special symbol. It is determined whether or not it is a probability variation jackpot B (step 013SHS1702). In step 013SHS1702, the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of jackpot to be executed by referring to the display result designation command.

When the effect control CPU 120 determines that the jackpot executed based on the variable display of the first special symbol is not the 10R probability variation jackpot B (step 013SHS1702: NO), that is, when it determines that the jackpot is 10R probability variation jackpot A. , Ends the process as it is.

On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the jackpot executed based on the variable display of the first special symbol is the 10R probability variation jackpot A (step 013SHS1702: YES), the effect control CPU 120 is in the remaining time suggestion mode. (Step 013SHS1703). In the remaining time suggestion mode, an effect mode that suggests the remaining time of the variable display of 6 minutes is performed. Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the remaining time suggestion mode (step 013SHS1704), and ends a series of processes.

(Remaining fluctuation time specification command reception processing in feature unit 013SH)
FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing a residual fluctuation time designation command reception process in the effect control process process of the feature unit 013SH. The remaining variation time designation command reception process is, for example, a process included in the variable display during effect process (step S172). The remaining fluctuation time designation command is a command transmitted at 10-second intervals or at the last 1 second during the jackpot fluctuation (during 6-minute fluctuation) of the first special symbol in the KT state.

In the residual variation time designation command reception process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the residual variation time designation command is being received (step 013SHS1801). If the remaining fluctuation time designation command has not been received (step 013SHS1801: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is. When the remaining fluctuation time designation command is received (step 013SHS1801: YES), it is determined whether or not the remaining time suggestion mode is in progress (step 013SHS1802).

When not in the remaining time suggestion mode (step 013SHS1802: NO), that is, when the jackpot symbol other than the 10R probability variation jackpot B is derived and displayed, the effect control CPU 120 processes as it is. To finish. On the other hand, when the remaining time suggestion mode is in effect (step 013SHS1802: YES), that is, when the jackpot symbol of the 10R probability variation jackpot B is derived and displayed, the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is being performed, the effect control CPU 120 receives. It is determined whether or not the residual fluctuation time designation command being used is any of the residual fluctuation time designation commands A1 to A34 (step 013SHS1803). The remaining fluctuation time designation commands A1 to A34 are commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 at 10-second intervals during the 6-minute variable display.

When the received residual fluctuation time designation command is any of the residual fluctuation time designation commands A1 to A34 (step 013SHS1803: YES), the effect control CPU 120 changes the background image to the background image according to the remaining time. (Step 013SHS1804), and the series of processes is completed.

On the other hand, when the received residual fluctuation time designation command is neither of the residual fluctuation time designation commands A1 to A34 (step 013SHS1803: NO), that is, when the residual fluctuation time designation command B1 is used, the effect control CPU 120 , A mode end notification image indicating the end of the remaining time suggestion mode is displayed (step 013SHS1805), and a series of processes is completed. The remaining fluctuation time designation command B1 is a command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 in the last 1 second during the variable display of 6 minutes.

(About an example of the production screen in each state including the KT state)
Next, an example of the effect screen in each state including the KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-19 to 10-21. 10-19 and 10-20 are explanatory views showing an example of the transition of the effect screen when the jackpot game of the 10R probability variation jackpot B is executed based on the variable display of the first special symbol in the KT state. ..

FIG. 10-19 (A) shows an effect screen during a round game in a 2R probability variation jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 10-19 (A), the image display device 5 displays a notification image 013SH180 for notifying that the jackpot game of the 2R probability variation jackpot is in progress. Further, in FIG. 10-19 (A), the total prize ball number display 013SH120 is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5. The total number of prize balls displayed 013SH120 indicates the total number of prize balls paid out from the start of the big hit to the present (in the figure, in the middle of one round).

Further, in the upper right corner of the image display device 5, a right-handed hit notification 013SH105 for prompting the game ball to be launched toward the right-handed game area is displayed. As a result, during the big hit game, the player can be urged to hit right, and the game ball can be won in the big winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 arranged on the right side of the game area of the game board 2. In addition, on the screen shown in FIG. 10-19 (A), a decorative symbol or a small symbol suggesting the jackpot type of the winning 2R jackpot may be displayed. In the 2R probability variation jackpot, when the round game of the final round is completed, the screen transitions to the screen shown in FIG. 10-19 (B).

FIG. 10-19 (B) shows an effect screen of the ending effect in the ending period of the 2R probability variation jackpot. This ending effect is an effect that accepts the effect mode. This effect mode is an effect mode executed in the KT state after the 2R jackpot game. Specifically, this effect mode is one of the small hit RUSH mode A and the small hit RUSH mode B. For example, suppose the player selects the small hit RUSH mode A. Right-handed notification 013SH105 is displayed from 2 seconds before the end of the ending period. Then, when the ending effect is finished (when the period controlled to the jackpot game state is finished), the screen transitions to the screen shown in FIG. 10-19 (C).

FIG. 10-19 (C) shows the first variable display controlled in small hit RUSH mode A (KT state). The image display device 5 displays that the small hit RUSH mode A has started (mode start display). The mode start display may be a dedicated screen inserted between the screen of the ending effect and the screen of the small hit RUSH mode A. The mode start display continues to be displayed for 3.5 seconds after the ending period ends. If the first variation of the second hold storage is a variable display in which the display result of the big hit is derived and displayed after being controlled to the KT state, a mode start display indicating that the small hit RUSH mode A is started is performed. Instead, the variable display of the decorative symbol 013SH100 corresponding to the second special symbol may be started.

Further, the image display device 5 displays a variable display (scroll) of the decorative pattern 013SH100A. In the KT state, the decorative symbol 013SH100A corresponds to the variable display of the second special symbol. The decorative symbol 013SH100A includes three symbols, a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol. The decorative design 013SH100A is a display mode corresponding to the small hit RUSH mode A.

Further, at the lower left of the image display device 5, a first small symbol 013SH101 corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is variably displayed (scrolled). At the lower right of the image display device 5, a second small symbol 013SH102 corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is variably displayed (scrolled).

Here, in the KT state, the fluctuation time of the loss of the first special symbol is 0.5 seconds, and the symbol determination time is 0.5 seconds. That is, in the KT state, the time required to digest one lost first reserved memory is 1 second. Therefore, even if the first reserved storage number is the maximum value "4", the start of the variable display of all the first reserved storages is completed within 3.5 seconds. In the present embodiment, when the mode start display shown in FIG. 10-19 (C) is being performed, the first reserved memory of the loss is digested.

Further, an active display 013SH110 corresponding to the variable display is displayed in the lower center of the image display device 5. Further, next to the active display 013SH110, a hold display 013SH111 indicating the second hold storage is displayed. In the KT state, since the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is as short as 0.5 seconds, the hold display indicating the first hold storage is not performed.

On the left side of the image display device 5, a first reserved number display 013SH131 indicating the first reserved number of stored numbers and a second reserved number display 013SH132 indicating the second reserved number of stored numbers are displayed.

Further, in the upper right corner of the image display device 5, a right-handed hit notification 013SH105 for prompting the game ball to be launched toward the right game area is displayed. As a result, in the KT state, the player can be urged to hit right and the game ball can be inserted into the second start winning opening.

The background image of the small hit RUSH mode A is a sunny background image 013SH150A indicating that the small hit RUSH mode A is used. Further, a total prize ball number display 013SH120 is displayed on the upper left portion of the image display device 5. The display mode of the total prize ball number display 013SH120 is the same display mode as the display mode during the jackpot game.

Further, in the small hit RUSH mode A, music is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. This song is a common song in the KT state.

Here, when the control of the small hit RUSH mode A (KT state) is started, it is assumed that the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number are both "4". The first reserved number display 013SH131 indicates "3". That is, it indicates that the first reserved storage number has been subtracted by "1" by starting the variable display of the first special symbol. Similarly, the second reserved digit display 013SH132 “3” is shown. That is, it indicates that the second reserved storage number has been subtracted by "1" by starting the variable display of the second special symbol.

Further, it is assumed that the third (last) hold memory among the three first hold memories indicated by the first hold number display 013SH131 is the hold memory that wins the 10R probability variation jackpot B. In the KT state, the fluctuation time of the loss of the first special symbol is 0.5 seconds. Further, in the KT state, the fluctuation time of the loss or small hit of the second special symbol is 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. Therefore, the first reserved memory is digested faster than the second reserved memory. The symbol determination time is 0.5 seconds for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

FIG. 10-19 (D) shows a screen during the small hit game in the small hit RUSH mode A. The image display device 5 is displayed as a combination (small hit symbol) of the decorative symbols 013SH100A (second small symbol 013SH102) of "1, 3, 5". Further, the image display device 5 displays a character image 013SH120A that notifies that it is a small hit. The character image 013SH120A is a display mode corresponding to the small hit RUSH mode A.

Further, in the small hit game state, the winning effect image 013SH121A showing that 10 winning balls have been obtained due to the winning of the special winning opening (for example, 1 ball) is displayed. The winning effect image 013SH121A is a display mode corresponding to the small hit RUSH mode A. The character image 013SH120A and the winning effect image 013SH121A are examples of the small hit notification effect.

Further, the total prize ball number display 0013H120 indicates a value (250) obtained by adding 10 balls. The display mode of the total prize ball number display 013SH120 is the same display mode as the display mode in the small hit RUSH mode A.

If there are a plurality of winnings in the special winning opening in the small hit game state (D), the winning effect image 013SH121 is displayed as many times as the number of winnings. Specifically, for example, when the number of winnings in the special winning opening is two, two winning effect images 013SH121 are displayed. Further, when there are a plurality of winning numbers in the special winning opening in the small hit game state, the winning effect image 013SH121 may display the number of winning balls according to the winning number. Specifically, for example, when the number of winnings in the special winning opening is two, "+20" may be displayed as the winning effect image 013SH121.

Further, in FIG. 10-19 (D), the first reserved number display 013SH131 indicates “2”. That is, the first special symbol indicates that the second variation has already started after being controlled by the small hit RUSH mode A.

FIG. 10-19 (E) shows a screen of the transition effect to the remaining time suggestion mode. The transition effect of the remaining time suggestion mode is an effect performed at the start of the jackpot variation (6 minute variation: special variable display) in which the display result of the 10R probability variation jackpot B is derived and displayed in the KT state. In FIG. 10-19 (E), the image display device 5 displays an image indicating that the mode shifts to the remaining time suggestion mode.

The variable display of the first special symbol in FIG. 10-19 (E) is the last of the four first reserved storages stored when the control of the small hit RUSH mode A (KT state) is started. 1 Variable display corresponding to hold storage is shown. The second reserved digit display 013SH132 "4" is shown. This indicates that the second start winning opening was won and the number of reserved memories increased due to the right-handed game.

The transition effect of the remaining time suggestion mode is performed for a predetermined time (for example, about several seconds). Therefore, even during the transition effect to the remaining time suggestion mode, a small hit occurs due to the variable display of the second special symbol. Although not shown, the effect screen in the remaining time suggestion mode is reduced to the front of the screen of the transition effect and displayed (wipe), for example, in the lower right corner of the image display device 5 during the transition effect to the remaining time suggestion mode. Is displayed. If a small hit occurs during the execution of the transition effect of the remaining time suggestion mode, the small hit notification effect (character image 013SH120B and winning effect image 013SH121B, which will be described later) is displayed on the reduced time suggestion mode effect screen. ) Is performed. When the transition effect of the remaining time suggestion mode is completed, the screen transitions to the screen shown in FIG. 10-19 (F).

Further, although not shown in FIG. 10-19 (E), the start of the special variable display (six-minute variation) enables a small hit game based on the variable display of the second special symbol. For this reason, if the player stops the game, he / she will not be able to obtain a ball from a small hit, which is disadvantageous. Therefore, in the transition effect to the remaining time suggestion mode, a notification for urging a right-handed hit is performed. This notification may be a notification mode different from the right-handed notification 013SH105. For example, a red belt is displayed at the top and bottom of the screen, and "Please hit right" is displayed in the red belt. In addition to this display, voice notification is performed.

Further, as this notification, for example, a notification such as "Keep hitting the cormorant in the remaining time suggestion mode" or "Do not stand up in the remaining time suggestion mode" may be performed. As a result, the game can be played for 6 minutes when the special variable display is performed.

FIG. 10-19 (F) shows a screen in which the remaining time suggestion mode is started. The image display device 5 displays a variable display (scroll) of the decorative pattern 013SH100B. The display mode of the decorative symbol 013SH100B in the remaining time suggestion mode is different from the display mode of the decorative symbol 013SH100A in the small hit RUSH mode A of (C). Specifically, the display mode of the decorative symbol 013SH100B in the remaining time suggestion mode is a white (white) display mode. On the other hand, the display mode of the decorative symbol 013SH100A in the small hit RUSH mode A is a black display mode.

The background image in the remaining time suggestion mode is different from the background image in the small hit RUSH mode A. Specifically, the background image of the remaining time suggestion mode is the night background image 013SH150B indicating that the remaining time suggestion mode is used. The night background image 013SH150B is displayed with a predetermined color (for example, gray) on the entire surface of the background. The background image 013SH150B is an example of a notification effect for notifying the residual fluctuation time of the special variable display. The area of the background image 013SH150B with a color (for example, gray) decreases every 10 seconds with the lapse of a variation time of 6 minutes.

Further, the display mode of the first small symbol 013SH101 is the same display mode in the remaining time suggestion mode and the small hit RUSH mode A. Further, the display position of the first small symbol 013SH101 is also the same display position in the remaining time suggestion mode and the small hit RUSH mode A. As described above, in the KT state, by setting the common first small symbol 013SH101 regardless of the effect mode, it is possible to suppress the visibility of the first small symbol 013SH101 from changing according to the effect mode. Therefore, the player can easily grasp the first small symbol 013SH101.

Similarly, the display mode of the second small symbol 013SH102 is the same display mode in the remaining time suggestion mode and the small hit RUSH mode A. Further, the display position of the second small symbol 013SH102 is also the same display position in the remaining time suggestion mode and the small hit RUSH mode A. As described above, in the KT state, by setting the common second small symbol 013SH102 regardless of the effect mode, it is possible to suppress the change in visibility of the second small symbol 013SH102 according to the effect mode. Therefore, the player can easily grasp the second small symbol 013SH102.

The display mode of the total prize ball number display 013SH120 is the same display mode as in the remaining time suggestion mode and the small hit RUSH mode A. Further, the display position of the total prize ball number display 013SH120 is also the same display position in the remaining time suggestion mode and the small hit RUSH mode A. As described above, in the KT state, by setting the common total prize ball number display 013SH120 regardless of the effect mode, it is possible to suppress the change in the visibility of the total prize ball number according to the effect mode. Therefore, the player can easily grasp the total number of prize balls.

Further, the display mode of the first reserved number display 013SH131 is the same display mode in the remaining time suggestion mode and the small hit RUSH mode A. Further, the display position of the first reserved number display 013SH131 is also the same display position in the remaining time suggestion mode and the small hit RUSH mode A. As described above, in the KT state, by setting the common first reserved number display 013SH131 regardless of the effect mode, it is possible to suppress the visibility of the first reserved number display 013SH131 from changing according to the effect mode. Therefore, the player can easily grasp the first reserved storage number.

Similarly, the display mode of the second reserved number display 013SH132 is the same display mode in the remaining time suggestion mode and the small hit RUSH mode A. Further, the display position of the second reserved number display 013SH132 is also the same display position in the remaining time suggestion mode and the small hit RUSH mode A. As described above, in the KT state, by setting the common second reserved number display 013SH132 regardless of the effect mode, it is possible to suppress the visibility of the second reserved number display 013SH132 from changing according to the effect mode. Therefore, the player can easily grasp the second reserved storage number.

Further, in the remaining time suggestion mode, music is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. This song is the same song that is output in the small hit RUSH mode A. As described above, in the KT state, by outputting the common music regardless of the production mode, it can be suggested that the KT state (advantageous state) is continued by the music.

Further, in the remaining time suggestion mode, the active display 013SH110 has the same display mode in the remaining time suggestion mode and the small hit RUSH mode A. However, the active display 013SH110 may have different display modes between the remaining time suggestion mode and the small hit RUSH mode A. For example, the active display 013SH110 may be a display mode corresponding to the remaining time suggestion mode. As a result, the active display 013SH110 can be set to a display mode peculiar to the remaining time suggestion mode, and the effect of the remaining time suggestion mode can be improved.

Further, in the remaining time suggestion mode, the hold display 013SH111 indicating the second hold storage has the same display mode in the remaining time suggestion mode and the small hit RUSH mode A. However, the hold display 013SH111 may have a different display mode between the remaining time suggestion mode and the small hit RUSH mode A. For example, the hold display 013SH111 may be a display mode corresponding to the remaining time suggestion mode. As a result, the hold display 013SH111 can be set as a display mode peculiar to the remaining time suggestion mode, and the effect of the remaining time suggestion mode can be improved.

In the KT state, a cumulative display indicating the cumulative number of times the small hit game has been executed may be performed. This cumulative number of times may be the cumulative number of times the small hit game is executed during the consecutive villas (for example, after the first big hit game until it returns to the normal state), or the small hit game for each KT state is executed. It may be the cumulative number of times. Further, this cumulative display may be a display mode and a display position common to the remaining time suggestion mode and the small hit RUSH mode A. As a result, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the cumulative display from changing depending on the effect mode. Therefore, the player can easily grasp the cumulative display.

Here, although the variable display is started in the small hit RUSH mode A, at the stop timing of this variable display, the mode may shift to the remaining time suggestion mode. Therefore, at the start of the variable display in the small hit RUSH mode A, the effect control CPU 120 displays the variable display result of the display mode corresponding to the small hit RUSH mode A and the variable display of the display mode corresponding to the remaining time suggestion mode. Select the display result. Then, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the controlled effect mode for the stop timing of the variable display, and stops and displays the display result in the display mode according to the effect mode. As a result, even if the effect mode is different between when the variable display is started and when the variable display is stopped, the variable display result can be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the effect mode.

Even when the small hit RUSH mode B is controlled, the transition effect is performed at the start of the big hit fluctuation (6 minute fluctuation: special variable display) in which the display result of the 10R probability variation big hit B is derived and displayed, and then the remaining. It is controlled to the time suggestion mode.

FIG. 10-20 (G) shows a screen when 3 minutes have passed out of the 6-minute variable display (special variable display). As shown in FIG. 10-20 (G), the colored area of the background image 013SH150B is reduced by half because half of the fluctuation time of the special variable display has elapsed. In FIG. 10-20 (G), the total number of prize balls displayed 013SH120 is 600 balls as compared with the total number of prize balls (270 balls) when shifting to the remaining time suggestion mode shown in FIG. 10-19 (E). Is added. This 600 balls corresponds to half the number of prize balls (about 1200 balls) that can be expected in the KT state for 6 minutes.

FIG. 10-20 (H) shows a screen when 4 minutes have passed out of the 6-minute variable display (special variable display). As shown in FIG. 10-20 (H), the colored area of the background image 013SH150B is reduced to 2/3 due to the passage of 2/3 of the fluctuation time of the special variable display. There is. In FIG. 10-20 (H), the total number of prize balls displayed 013SH120 is 800 balls as compared with the total number of prize balls (270 balls) when shifting to the remaining time suggestion mode shown in FIG. 10-19 (E). Is added. This 800 balls corresponds to two-thirds of the number of prize balls (about 1200 balls) that can be expected in the KT state for 6 minutes.

Further, FIG. 10-20 (H) shows a screen during the small hit game in the remaining time suggestion mode. The image display device 5 displays a character image 013SH120B that notifies that it is a small hit. The character image 013SH120B is a display mode corresponding to the remaining time suggestion mode. The character image 013SH120B is, for example, a character different from the character image 013SH120A in the small hit RUSH mode A.

In addition, the image display device 5 displays a winning effect image 013SH121B indicating that 10 winning balls have been obtained due to a winning (for example, 1 ball) in the special winning opening in the small hit game state. Has been done. The winning effect image 013SH121B is a display mode corresponding to the remaining time suggestion mode. That is, the display mode of the winning effect image 013SH121B in the remaining time suggestion mode is different from the display mode of the winning effect image 013SH121A (see FIG. 10-19 (D)) in the small hit RUSH mode A.

FIG. 10-20 (I) shows a screen when 5 minutes have passed out of the 6-minute variable display (special variable display). As shown in FIG. 10-20 (I), the colored area of the background image 013SH150B is reduced to 5/6 due to the passage of 5/6 of the fluctuation time of the special variable display. There is. In FIG. 10-20 (I), the total number of prize balls displayed 013SH120 is 1000 balls as compared with the total number of prize balls (270 balls) when shifting to the remaining time suggestion mode shown in FIG. 10-19 (E). Is added. This 1000 balls corresponds to 5/6 of the number of prize balls (about 1200 balls) that can be expected in the KT state for 6 minutes.

FIG. 10-20 (J) shows a screen when the last 1 second is reached (when 5 minutes 59 seconds have passed) in the 6-minute variable display (special variable display). In FIG. 10-20 (J), the image display device 5 displays a mode end notification image for notifying the end of the remaining time suggestion mode. The mode end notification image is displayed so as to interrupt the image in the remaining time suggestion mode. As shown in FIG. 10-20 (J), the image display device 5 does not display the total number of prize balls display 013SH120, the active display 013SH110, the hold display 013SH111, or the like. On the other hand, the first small symbol 013SH101, the second small symbol 013SH102, the first reserved number display 013SH131, the second reserved number display 013SH132, and the right-handed notification 013SH105 are displayed.

When the mode end notification image shown in FIG. 10-20 (J) is displayed, a display result indicating that the second special symbol is a small hit may be derived and displayed. In this case, the second small symbol 013SH102 may be stopped and displayed by the small hit symbol to control the small hit game state. Then, when the 6-minute variable display is completed, the screen transitions to the screen shown in FIG. 10-20 (K).

FIG. 10-20 (K) shows a notification effect screen of the 10R probability variation jackpot B. As shown in FIG. 10-20 (K), the image display device 5 displays a broadcast image for notifying the 10R probability variation jackpot B. In FIG. 10-20 (K), the first small symbol 013SH101 is derived and displayed as a combination indicating a 10R probability variation jackpot B (for example, a combination of odd doublets "3, 3, 3"). Further, in the second small symbol 013SH102, the lost symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in accordance with the stop display of the first small symbol 013SH101.

Here, when a big hit occurs, the gate passage waiting process (see FIGS. 9-18 and 9-19) is performed. In the remaining time suggestion mode, although the game is performed by hitting right, if the game ball does not pass through the passing gate 41 for 5 seconds after the big hit occurs, a promotion notification prompting the passage of the passing gate 41 is issued. Will be done.

In FIG. 10-20 (K), the total number of prize balls displayed 013SH120 is 1200 balls as compared with the total number of prize balls (270 balls) when shifting to the remaining time suggestion mode shown in FIG. 10-19 (E). Is added. This 1200 balls corresponds to the number of prize balls (about 1200 balls) that can be expected in the KT state for 6 minutes.

FIG. 10-20 (L) shows the jackpot effect of the jackpot game of the 10R probability variation jackpot B. The jackpot effect shown in FIG. 10-20 (L) is a special jackpot effect corresponding to the remaining time suggestion mode. In this special jackpot effect, a character image, a background image, etc. related to the remaining time suggestion mode may be displayed, or a sound related to the remaining time suggestion mode may be output. By performing the special jackpot effect, it is possible to perform a series of effects by the remaining time suggestion mode and the special jackpot effect.

The figure shows the screen during the ending period. In FIG. 10-20 (L), 1200 balls are added to the total prize ball number display 013SH120 as compared with the total prize ball number (1470 balls) at the start of the big hit shown in FIG. 10-20 (K). .. This 1200 balls corresponds to the number of prize balls (1200 balls) for 10 rounds of the 10R probability variation jackpot B.

Although not shown, if the jackpot fluctuation (2-minute fluctuation) of the second special symbol in which the jackpot display result of the 10R probability variation jackpot B is derived and displayed is performed in the KT state, the remaining time suggestion mode is set. It is not controlled, and in the small hit RUSH mode A, the big hit notification effect is performed after the reach effect and the like are performed.

As shown in FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20, in the KT state, the jackpot variation (6 minute variation: special variable display) of the first special symbol in which the display result of the 10R probability variation jackpot B is derived and displayed is performed. In that case, the effect mode is controlled to the remaining time suggestion mode. Therefore, by performing the effect of the remaining time suggestion mode, it is confirmed that the ball can be obtained by the small hit for 6 minutes during the special variable display and the ball by the next big hit. Therefore, the player can be uplifted by the effect of the remaining time suggestion mode.

In particular, in the KT state, the variable display of the first special symbol is rarely performed, and the jackpot is rarely generated based on the variable display of the first special symbol. Among them, the 10R probability variable jackpot A It is extremely rare to win. Therefore, the remaining time suggestion mode can be set as a premium effect. Therefore, since the desire to make the remaining time suggestion mode appear can be increased, the player's willingness to play can be stimulated. In addition, since the special jackpot effect can be a series of effects of the remaining time suggestion mode and the special jackpot effect, it is possible to continue the rare effect even after the transition to the jackpot game state. Therefore, the interest of the game can be further improved.

FIG. 10-21 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a transition of the effect screen when a big hit game other than the 10R probability variation big hit A is executed based on the variable display of the first special symbol in the small hit RUSH mode A. Note that FIG. 10-21 describes the production screen at the timing corresponding to FIGS. 10-19 (C), (E), 10-20 (G), (H), (K), and (L). ..

FIG. 10-21 (A) shows the first variable display controlled in small hit RUSH mode A (KT state). The screen shown in FIG. 10-21 (A) is the same as the screen shown in FIG. 10-19 (C).

FIG. 10-21 (B) shows the first special in which the display result of a jackpot other than the 10R probability variation jackpot B (10R probability variation jackpot A, 10R normal jackpot, or 2R probability variation jackpot) is derived and displayed in the small hit RUSH mode A. The screen when the big hit fluctuation of the symbol (6 minutes fluctuation: special variable display) is started is shown.

In FIG. 10-21 (B), the small hit RUSH mode A is continuously controlled. Here, in the case of the special variable display in which the display result of the 10R probability variation jackpot B is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 10-19 (E), the transition effect to the remaining time suggestion mode is produced at the start of the special variable display. Is done. On the other hand, when the display result of the 10R probability variation jackpot A, the 10R normal jackpot, or the special variable display of the 2R probability variation jackpot is derived and displayed, the transition effect to the remaining time suggestion mode is not performed.

When the special variable display is performed, the small hit RUSH mode A is continuously controlled. For this reason, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the special variable display is changing.

FIG. 10-21 (C) shows a screen when 3 minutes have passed out of the 6-minute variable display (special variable display). In FIG. 10-21 (C), the total prize ball number display 013SH120 is 600, as compared with the total prize ball number (270 balls) at the start of the fluctuation of the special variable display shown in FIG. 10-21 (B). The sphere is added. This 600 balls corresponds to half the number of prize balls (about 1200 balls) that can be expected in the KT state for 6 minutes.

FIG. 10-21 (D) shows a screen when 4 minutes have passed out of the 6-minute variable display (special variable display). In FIG. 10-21 (D), the total prize ball number display 013SH120 is 800 as compared with the total prize ball number (270 balls) at the start of the fluctuation of the special variable display shown in FIG. 10-21 (B). The sphere is added. This 800 balls corresponds to two-thirds of the number of prize balls (about 1200 balls) that can be expected in the KT state for 6 minutes.

As shown in FIGS. 10-21 (C) and 10-21 (D), when the special variable display is performed, the small hit RUSH mode A is continuously controlled. In addition, even when the last 1 second of the special variable display is reached (when 5 minutes 59 seconds have passed), the small hit RUSH mode A is controlled.

FIG. 10-21 (E) shows a notification effect screen of 10R normal jackpot or 10R probability variation jackpot A (before promotion). In the case of a 2R probability variation jackpot, although not shown, an effect of notifying the 2R probability variation jackpot is performed. As shown in FIG. 10-21 (E), the image display device 5 displays a notification image for notifying the 10R normal jackpot. In the background image of the normal big hit shown in FIG. 10-21 (E), the background image corresponding to the small hit RUSH mode A is continuously displayed.

Further, in FIG. 10-21 (E), in the first small symbol 013SH101, a combination indicating a 6R normal jackpot B (for example, a combination of even-numbered doublets "6, 6, 6") is derived and displayed. Further, in the second small symbol 013SH102, the lost symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in accordance with the stop display of the first small symbol 013SH101.

In FIG. 10-21 (E), the total prize ball number display 013SH120 is 1200 as compared with the total prize ball number (270 balls) at the start of the fluctuation of the special variable display shown in FIG. 10-21 (B). The sphere is added. This 1200 balls corresponds to the number of prize balls (about 1200 balls) that can be expected in the KT state for 6 minutes.

In the case of a 10R normal jackpot, an ending effect for a 10R normal jackpot (not shown) is performed, and when the jackpot game is finished, the time saving mode is controlled. On the other hand, in the case of the 10R probability variation jackpot A, the screen transitions to the screen shown in FIG. 10-21 (F).

FIG. 10-21 (F) shows the jackpot effect of the jackpot game of the 10R probability variation jackpot A. The jackpot effect shown in FIG. 10-21 (F) is a promotion effect. The figure shows the screen during the ending period. The promotion effect is an effect that pretends that the 10R normal jackpot is being executed, and actually notifies that the 10R probability variation jackpot A is being executed. In this way, the player can be discouraged by pretending that the 10R normal jackpot is being executed, and then the promotion effect can be performed to uplift the player. Therefore, the psychological difference can further enhance the uplifting feeling of the player.

In FIG. 10-21 (F), 1200 balls are added to the total prize ball number display 013SH120 as compared with the total prize ball number (1470 balls) at the start of the big hit shown in FIG. 10-21 (E). .. This 1200 balls corresponds to the number of prize balls (1200 balls) for 10 rounds of the 10R probability variation jackpot A.

Although not shown, in the KT state, when the jackpot fluctuation (2-minute fluctuation) of the second special symbol in which the display result of the jackpot other than the 10R probability variation jackpot B is derived and displayed is performed, the remaining time suggestion mode is performed. In the small hit RUSH mode A, the big hit notification effect is performed after the reach effect and the like are performed.

As shown in FIG. 10-21, when the jackpot fluctuation (6-minute fluctuation: special variable display) of the first special symbol in which the display result of the jackpot other than the 10R probability variation jackpot B is derived and displayed is performed in the KT state. The small hit RUSH mode A is continuously controlled. For this reason, although it is confirmed that the ball output by the small hit for 6 minutes during the special variable display and the ball output by the next big hit can be obtained, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the ball.

Here, in the KT state, the variable display of the first special symbol is rarely performed, and further, a big hit is rarely generated based on the variable display of the first special symbol. In this rare case, in the feature unit 013SH, the small hit RUSH mode A is continuously controlled as in the case where the big hit is generated based on the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, when the small hit RUSH mode A continues for 6 minutes, many players recognize that the variable display of the second special symbol has continued for 6 minutes because the big hit did not happen to occur. It becomes. Therefore, since the average duration (ball output) of the small hit RUSH mode A can be increased, the interest of the small hit RUSH mode A can be improved. In addition, the effect of the small hit RUSH mode A makes it possible to produce a more rare effect of the remaining time suggestion mode.

FIG. 10-22 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a transition of the effect screen when a big hit game other than the 10R probability variation big hit A is executed based on the variable display of the first special symbol in the small hit RUSH mode B. Note that FIG. 10-21 corresponds to FIGS. 10-19 (C), (E), 10-20 (G), (H), (K), and (L), similarly to FIG. 10-22. The production screen at the timing will be described. In the description of FIG. 10-22, the same contents as those described in FIG. 10-21 will be omitted as appropriate.

FIG. 10-22 (A) shows the first variable display controlled in small hit RUSH mode B (KT state). The image display device 5 displays that the small hit RUSH mode B has started (mode start display). Further, on the image display device 5, the character 013SH160 corresponding to the small hit RUSH mode B is displayed as a background image. Hereinafter, the display screen of the small hit RUSH mode B will be described in comparison with the display screen of the small hit RUSH mode A and the remaining time suggestion mode.

In addition, among the display modes of each image in the small hit RUSH mode B, those different from the display modes of the small hit RUSH mode A and the remaining time suggestion mode will be sequentially described. In the small hit RUSH mode B, the decorative symbol 013SH100A (see FIG. 10-19 (C)) is not displayed. The background image of the small hit RUSH mode B is different from the background image of the small hit RUSH mode A and the remaining time suggestion mode. Specifically, the background image of the small hit RUSH mode B is a cloudy background image 013SH150C, and the character 013SH160 is displayed so as to move from left to right.

Next, among the display modes of each image in the small hit RUSH mode B, those similar to the display modes of the small hit RUSH mode A and the remaining time suggestion mode are listed in (1) to (7) below.
(1) First small symbol 013SH101
(2) Second small symbol 013SH102
(3) Total prize ball number display 013SH120
(4) First hold number display 013SH131
(5) Second hold number display 013SH132
(6) Active display 013SH110
(7) Hold display 013SH111
Further, the music output from the speakers 8L and 8R in the small hit RUSH mode B is the same as the music output in the small hit RUSH mode A and the remaining time suggestion mode.
In the KT state, a cumulative display indicating the cumulative number of times the small hit game has been executed may be performed. The cumulative display may be a display mode and a display position common to the small hit RUSH mode A and the small hit RUSH mode B.

FIG. 10-22 (B) shows the first special in which the display result of a jackpot other than the 10R probability variation jackpot B (10R probability variation jackpot A, 10R normal jackpot, or 2R probability variation jackpot) is derived and displayed in the small hit RUSH mode B. The screen when the big hit fluctuation of the symbol (6 minutes fluctuation: special variable display) is started is shown.

In FIG. 10-22 (B), the small hit RUSH mode B is continuously controlled. Here, in the case of the special variable display in which the display result of the 10R probability variation jackpot B is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 10-19 (E), the transition effect to the remaining time suggestion mode is produced at the start of the special variable display. Is done. On the other hand, when the display result of the 10R probability variation jackpot A, the 10R normal jackpot, or the special variable display of the 2R probability variation jackpot is derived and displayed, the transition effect to the remaining time suggestion mode is not performed.

When the special variable display is performed, the small hit RUSH mode A is continuously controlled. For this reason, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the special variable display is changing.

FIG. 10-22 (C) shows a screen when 3 minutes have passed out of the 6-minute variable display (special variable display). The character 013SH120C is displayed on the image display device 5. For example, the enemy character 013SH161 is an effect of notifying the occurrence of a small hit. Specifically, the enemy character 013SH161 is displayed in a variable display in which a display result indicating a small hit is derived and displayed.

In FIG. 10-22 (C), the total prize ball number display 013SH120 is 600 as compared with the total prize ball number (270 balls) at the start of the fluctuation of the special variable display shown in FIG. 10-22 (B). The sphere is added. This 600 balls corresponds to half the number of prize balls (about 1200 balls) that can be expected in the KT state for 6 minutes.

FIG. 10-22 (D) shows a screen when 4 minutes have passed out of the 6-minute variable display (special variable display). The image display device 5 displays an image in which the character 013SH160 destroys the enemy character 013SH161. The set value may be suggested depending on the operation mode of the character 013SH160 and the enemy character 013SH161. For example, the set value may be suggested by the type and number of the enemy character 013SH161, the technique (punch, kick) by which the character 013SH160 destroys the enemy character, the number of destroyers, and the like. Further, the set value may be suggested based on the total number of enemy characters destroyed in the small hit RUSH mode B. That is, the small hit RUSH mode B may be an effect mode that suggests a set value.

In addition, the image display device 5 displays a winning effect image 013SH121C indicating that 10 winning balls have been obtained due to a winning (for example, 1 ball) in the special winning opening in the small hit game state. Has been done. The winning effect image 013SH121C is a display mode corresponding to the small hit RUSH mode B. That is, the display mode of the winning effect image 015SH121C in the small hit RUSH mode B is the winning effect image 013SH121A in the small hit RUSH mode A (see FIG. 10-19 (D)) and the winning effect image 015SH121B in the remaining time suggestion mode (FIG. It is a display mode different from the display mode (see 10-19 (H)). The set value may be suggested depending on the display mode of the winning effect image 013SH121C. For example, the set value may be suggested by the color, size, character type, etc. of the winning effect image 013SH121C.

In FIG. 10-22 (D), the total prize ball number display 013SH120 is 800 as compared with the total prize ball number (270 balls) at the start of the fluctuation of the special variable display shown in FIG. 10-22 (B). The sphere is added. This 800 balls corresponds to two-thirds of the number of prize balls (about 1200 balls) that can be expected in the KT state for 6 minutes.

As shown in FIGS. 10-22 (C) and 10-21 (D), when the special variable display is performed, the small hit RUSH mode B is continuously controlled. In addition, even when the last 1 second of the special variable display is reached (when 5 minutes 59 seconds have passed), the small hit RUSH mode B is controlled.

FIG. 10-22 (E) shows a notification effect screen of 10R normal jackpot or 10R probability variation jackpot A (before promotion). In the case of a 2R probability variation jackpot, although not shown, an effect of notifying the 2R probability variation jackpot is performed. As shown in FIG. 10-22 (E), the image display device 5 displays a notification image for notifying the 10R normal jackpot. In the background image of the normal big hit shown in FIG. 10-22 (E), the background image corresponding to the small hit RUSH mode B is continuously displayed. The background image of the normal big hit differs depending on whether the effect mode before the start of the big hit is the small hit RUSH mode A or the small hit RUSH mode B. However, the background image of the normal jackpot may be a common background image regardless of the effect mode before the start of the jackpot.

In FIG. 10-22 (E), the total prize ball number display 013SH120 is 1200 as compared with the total prize ball number (270 balls) at the start of the fluctuation of the special variable display shown in FIG. 10-22 (B). The sphere is added. This 1200 balls corresponds to the number of prize balls (about 1200 balls) that can be expected in the KT state for 6 minutes.

In the case of a 10R normal jackpot, an ending effect for a 10R normal jackpot (not shown) is performed, and when the jackpot game is finished, the time saving mode is controlled. On the other hand, in the case of the 10R probability variation jackpot A, the screen transitions to the screen shown in FIG. 10-22 (F).

FIG. 10-22 (F) shows the jackpot effect of the jackpot game of the 10R probability variation jackpot A. The jackpot effect shown in FIG. 10-22 (F) is a promotion effect. The figure shows the screen during the ending period. The promotion effect is an effect that pretends that the 10R normal jackpot is being executed, and actually notifies that the 10R probability variation jackpot A is being executed. In this way, the player can be discouraged by pretending that the 10R normal jackpot is being executed, and then the promotion effect can be performed to uplift the player. Therefore, the psychological difference can further enhance the uplifting feeling of the player.

In FIG. 10-22 (F), 1200 balls are added to the total prize ball number display 013SH120 as compared with the total prize ball number (1470 balls) at the start of the big hit shown in FIG. 10-22 (E). .. This 1200 balls corresponds to the number of prize balls (1200 balls) for 10 rounds of the 10R probability variation jackpot A.

Although not shown, in the KT state, when the jackpot fluctuation (2-minute fluctuation) of the second special symbol in which the display result of the jackpot other than the 10R probability variation jackpot B is derived and displayed is performed, the remaining time suggestion mode is performed. In the small hit RUSH mode B, the big hit notification effect is performed after the reach effect and the like are performed.

As shown in FIG. 10-22, when the jackpot fluctuation (6-minute fluctuation: special variable display) of the first special symbol in which the display result of the jackpot other than the 10R probability variation jackpot B is derived and displayed is performed in the KT state. The small hit RUSH mode B is continuously controlled. For this reason, although it is confirmed that the ball output by the small hit for 6 minutes during the special variable display and the ball output by the next big hit can be obtained, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the ball.

Here, in the KT state, the variable display of the first special symbol is rarely performed, and further, a big hit is rarely generated based on the variable display of the first special symbol. In this rare case, in the feature unit 013SH, the small hit RUSH mode B is continuously controlled as in the case where the big hit is generated based on the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, when the small hit RUSH mode B continues for 6 minutes, many players recognize that the variable display of the second special symbol has continued for 6 minutes because the big hit did not happen to occur. It becomes. Therefore, since the average duration (ball output) of the small hit RUSH mode B can be increased, the interest of the small hit RUSH mode B can be improved. In addition, the effect of the small hit RUSH mode B makes it possible to produce a more rare effect of the remaining time suggestion mode.

As described above, in the above-described embodiment, when the special variable display (six-minute variation) is executed as the variable display of the first special symbol in the KT state, the remaining different from the small hit RUSH modes A and B. In the time suggestion mode, the effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, in the KT state, it is possible to control to one of a plurality of types of effect modes, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the second special symbol is in the small hit game state, the variable display of the first special symbol (variation for 6 minutes) is interrupted, and after the interruption, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed. Was restarted, and the effect corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time was executed based on the remaining fluctuation time specification command. Therefore, even if the variable display (six-minute fluctuation) of the first special symbol is interrupted when the second special symbol is in the small hit game state, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the remaining fluctuation of the second special symbol. It is possible to perform the production.

(Modification example 1 of feature unit 013SH)
Next, a modification 1 of the feature portion 013SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature unit 013SH, a configuration for shifting to a probabilistic state (high probability / high base state) after the end of the remaining time suggestion mode has been described. In addition to or in place of such a configuration, the KT state (high probability / low base state) may be entered after the end of the remaining time suggestion mode.

Specifically, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the small hit RUSH mode A and the small hit RUSH mode B, the display result of the 2R probability variation jackpot is derived and displayed, and the jackpot variation (6 minute variation: special variable) of the first special symbol is displayed. When the display) is performed, the remaining time suggestion mode may be controlled. As a result, after the end of the remaining time suggestion mode, the 2R probability variation jackpot can be executed, and then the state can be shifted to the KT state (high probability / low base state). Further, the number of jackpot rounds that can be transferred to the KT state after executing the jackpot game is not limited to 2 rounds, and may be, for example, 10 rounds.

Further, in the modified example 1 of the feature unit 013SH, the effect of the remaining time suggestion mode may be executed only when the display result of the 2R probability variation jackpot is derived and displayed. That is, when the display results of the 10R probability variation jackpots A and B and the 10R normal jackpots are derived and displayed, the effect of the remaining time suggestion mode may be disabled.

According to the first modification of the feature unit 013SH, it can be suggested that the KT state continues by executing the remaining time suggestion mode. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 013SH, the KT state is the most pleasing gaming state for the player. According to the first modification of the feature unit 013SH, the execution of the remaining time suggestion mode can suggest the continuation of the KT state, so that the player can be uplifted. Therefore, the interest of the game can be further improved.

(Modification example 2 of feature unit 013SH)
Next, a modification 2 of the feature portion 013SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment of the feature unit 013SH, a configuration for executing an effect suggesting the remaining time in the remaining time suggestion mode has been described. In addition to or instead of such a configuration, an effect suggesting the remaining time may be executed in the small hit RUSH mode A and the small hit RUSH mode B.

For example, in the small hit RUSH mode A or the small hit RUSH mode B, a gauge image may be displayed in a corner of the image display device 5 to suggest the remaining time. According to the second modification, in the small hit RUSH mode A and the small hit RUSH mode B, by suggesting the remaining time, it can be suggested that the KT state does not end immediately. Therefore, in the small hit RUSH mode A and the small hit RUSH mode B, it is possible to suppress the player's anxiety that the KT state may be terminated immediately.

(Modification example 3 of feature unit 013SH)
Next, a modification 3 of the feature portion 013SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment of the feature unit 013SH, the configuration in which the remaining time suggestion mode is performed for a certain period (6 minutes: during special variable display) has been described. In addition to, or in place of, such a configuration, the remaining time suggestion mode may be performed during any of, for example, 1 minute, 3 minutes, and 6 minutes.

Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may prepare a plurality of fluctuation patterns of different fluctuation times as fluctuation patterns of the special variable display. The plurality of different fluctuation time fluctuation patterns are, for example, a 1-minute fluctuation pattern, a 3-minute fluctuation pattern, and a 6-minute fluctuation pattern. In the variable display in which the display result indicating a big hit is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol in the KT state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 selects one of a plurality of special variable display fluctuation patterns. You can select by lottery.

Further, in the modification 3 of the feature unit 013SH, the player may be able to recognize the time during which the effect of the remaining time suggestion mode is performed at the start of the remaining time suggestion mode. Specifically, when the special variable display has a fluctuation time of 1 minute, the area with the color (for example, gray) of the background image 013SH150B at the start of the remaining time suggestion mode is 6 minutes for the special variable display. When the fluctuation time is used, the area may be 1/6. Similarly, when the special variable display has a fluctuation time of 3 minutes, the area with the color (for example, gray) of the background image 013SH150B at the start of the remaining time suggestion mode is covered by the special variable display with a fluctuation time of 6 minutes. If is, the area may be halved. As a result, the remaining time can be suggested to the player at the start of the remaining time suggestion mode.

Further, at the start of the remaining time suggestion mode, it may be difficult for the player to recognize the time when the effect of the remaining time suggestion mode is performed. In this case, at the start of the remaining time suggestion mode, for example, the background image 013SH150B is colored (for example, gray) on the entire surface, and the colored area of the background image 013SH150B is changed at a speed according to the remaining time. You may let it. However, depending on the speed at which the area is changed, the player can easily estimate the production time of the remaining time suggestion mode.

Therefore, the speed at which the area is changed may be increased at a certain timing or decreased at another timing, instead of being set to a constant speed. More specifically, in the early stage of the remaining time suggestion mode, the speed of changing the area may be slowed down, and in the final stage, the speed of changing the area may be increased. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the remaining time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is also possible to combine the modified example 3 of the feature portion 013SH with the modified example 1. For example, as in the modified example 1, in the KT state, in addition to the 10R probability variation jackpot B, the jackpot variation (special variable display) of the first special symbol in which the display result of another type of jackpot is derived and displayed is performed. However, it is assumed that the remaining time suggestion mode can be controlled. In this case, in the modification 3, the type of jackpot may be suggested according to the effect time (variation pattern of the special variable display) of the remaining time suggestion mode.

Specifically, in the selection of the variation pattern of the special variable display, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can easily select the variation pattern of the special variable display of 6 minutes in the case of the 10R probability variation jackpot B, and another jackpot. In the case of (for example, 10R normal jackpot), it is sufficient to make it easy to select the fluctuation pattern of the special variable display for 1 minute. As a result, it can be suggested that there is a high possibility that the 10R probability variation jackpot B is performed when the effect in the remaining time suggestion mode is performed for 6 minutes, and the effect in the remaining time suggestion mode is performed for 1 minute. In some cases, it can be suggested that there is a high possibility of another jackpot (for example, 10R normal jackpot).

According to the modification 3 of the feature unit 013SH, since the effect time of the remaining time suggestion mode can be made variable, the degree of advantage of the player by the small hit game is different depending on the remaining time suggestion mode to be executed. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the remaining time suggestion mode.

(Modification example 4 of feature unit 013SH)
Next, a modification 4 of the feature portion 013SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature unit 013SH, the configuration in which the remaining time suggestion mode is always performed in the jackpot variation of the 10R probability variation jackpot B based on the first special symbol in the KT state has been described. In addition to, or in place of, such a configuration, in the jackpot fluctuation of the 10R probability variation jackpot B based on the first special symbol in the KT state, only at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing of the pending ream). The remaining time suggestion mode may be performed.

Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 remains in the jackpot fluctuation of the 10R probability variation jackpot B based on the first special symbol in the KT state only when it is within 3.5 seconds after being controlled in the KT state. The time suggestion mode may be performed. Generally, in the case of the first hit, there is a high possibility that the first reserved memory remains after the transition to the KT state. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the KT state, the fluctuation time of the loss of the first special symbol is 0.5 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time is 0.5 seconds. That is, in the KT state, the time required to digest one first reserved memory is 1 second. Therefore, even if the first reserved storage number is the maximum value "4", the start of the variable display of all the first reserved storages is completed within 3.5 seconds.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 (CPU 120 for effect control) counts the number of seconds after being controlled to the KT state, and when 3.5 seconds have passed since being controlled to the KT state, it is based on the first special symbol. Even when the jackpot fluctuation of the 10R probability variation jackpot B is performed, the remaining time suggestion mode is not performed.

With such a configuration, the remaining time suggestion mode can be performed only at the timing of the hold sequence. Therefore, according to the modification 4 of the feature portion 013SH, the remaining time suggestion mode can be made a more rare effect.

(Modification 5 of feature unit 013SH)
Next, a modification 5 of the feature portion 013SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment of the feature unit 013SH, the configuration of suggesting the remaining time in the remaining time suggestion mode without considering the interruption period of the update of the 10-second timer has been described. In addition to or instead of such a configuration, in the remaining time suggestion mode, the remaining time may be suggested in consideration of the interruption period of the update of the 10-second timer.

More specifically, as described above, the game control microcomputer 100 interrupts the update of the 10-second timer when the small hit game based on the variable display of the second special symbol is performed in the special variable display ( (See FIGS. 10-12 and 10-13). In the fourth modification of the feature unit 013SH, when the update of the 10-second timer is interrupted, the pachinko gaming machine 1 transmits an interruption command to that effect to the effect control CPU 120. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 restarts the update of the 10-second timer, it transmits a restart command to that effect to the effect control CPU 120.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the remaining fluctuation time designation command transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 100 at 10-second intervals, the effect control CPU 120 starts updating the timer that measures 10 seconds. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the suspend command, the effect control CPU 120 suspends the update of the timer. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the restart command, the effect control CPU 120 restarts the update of the timer.

As a result, the effect control CPU 120 can manage the remaining time in the remaining time suggestion mode in detail. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can count down at intervals of 1 second, for example. When a small hit game based on the variable display is performed on the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 may interrupt the countdown.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 may perform a countdown according to the remaining time in the remaining time suggestion mode. For example, the countdown may not be performed at the beginning of the remaining time suggestion mode (for example, up to 5 minutes), but may be performed at the end of the remaining time suggestion mode (for example, after 5 minutes have passed).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, of the special variable display, a special effect (display of the mode end notification image) is performed in the last 1 second, but in the modified example 5, the last 1 second is not limited to the last 1 second, and at an arbitrary timing. It is possible to perform a special effect.

According to the modification 5 of the feature unit 013SH, the remaining time can be suggested in more detail in the effect of the remaining time suggestion mode. Therefore, the production by the remaining time suggestion mode can be made more interesting.

(Modification example 6 of feature unit 013SH)
Next, a modification 6 of the feature portion 013SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment of the feature unit 013SH, a configuration is described in which a jackpot variation (special variable display) of the first special symbol in the KT state is used to indicate the remaining time. In addition to or in place of such a configuration, it is also possible to perform an effect of suggesting the remaining time by variable display of the second special symbol in the non-KT state.

For example, in the non-KT state, the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation (second fluctuation pattern # 63 in FIG. 10-8) based on the variable display of the second special symbol is 5 minutes. For example, it is possible to perform an effect that suggests the remaining time until the jackpot (effect by the remaining time suggestion mode). The measurement of the remaining time of the second special symbol may be the same as the measurement of the remaining time of the first special symbol.

Specifically, in the modified example 6, when the first special symbol is in the big hit game state, the variable display of the second special symbol (variation for 5 minutes) is interrupted, and after the interruption, the variable display of the second special symbol is changed. Is restarted, and the effect corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time is executed based on the remaining fluctuation time specification command. Therefore, according to the modification 6 of the feature unit 013SH, even if the variable display (5-minute variation) of the second special symbol is interrupted when the first special symbol is in the big hit game state, the effect control CPU 120 is It is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the residual fluctuation of the first special symbol.

Further, in the modified example 6 of the feature unit 013SH, when the special variable display (5-minute variation) is executed as the variable display of the second special symbol in the non-KT state, it is different from the probability variation mode, the time saving mode, and the normal mode. In the remaining time suggestion mode, the effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Therefore, according to the modification 6 of the feature unit 013SH, in the non-KT state, it is possible to control to any one of a plurality of types of effect modes, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

(Modification example 7 of feature unit 013SH)
Next, a modification 7 of the feature portion 013SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature unit 013SH, a configuration in which the feature unit 013SH is applied to the so-called one-type pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described. Instead of such a configuration, it is also possible to apply the feature unit 013SH to a so-called one-kind two-kind mixed type pachinko gaming machine. An example of one specification of a pachinko machine of a mixed type of one type and two types will be described below.

One-type and two-kind mixed type pachinko game machines are, for example, a first start winning opening that can be won by left-handed, a gate that can be won by right-handed, a second starting winning opening that can be won by right-handed, and right-handed. It is equipped with a special variable winning ball device (small hit attacker) that can be won by. A specific area (so-called V area) is provided in the special variable winning ball device. Further, the pachinko gaming machine of the one-type and two-type mixed type is controlled to either a normal state (low base state) or a time saving state (high base state). Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the one-type and two-type mixed type, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be changed at the same time.

In the normal state, the game is progressed mainly by the variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol game) by hitting the left. When the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, the jackpot game is executed.

In the determination based on the winning of the first starting winning opening, the small hit probability is, for example, 1/100. Even if the small hit game is executed based on the winning of the first starting winning opening, the game ball cannot be expected to win a prize in the special variable winning ball device, and the passage of the specific area (V area) is further increased. You can't expect it.

For example, in the first special figure game, when it is determined that the jackpot game is to be executed, the time is shortened after the jackpot game according to the jackpot type (with a predetermined probability). Depending on the type of jackpot, it may return to the normal state after the jackpot game.

In the time saving state, the game (mainly the second special figure game) is advanced by right-handed aiming at the gate arranged on the right side of the game area and the second start winning opening. In the time saving state, the following controls (1) to (4) are performed.
(1) The probability of hitting a normal figure is higher than in the normal state.
(2) The opening time of the ordinary electric accessory is longer than that in the normal state.
(3) The fluctuation time of the normal map game is shorter than that in the normal state.
(4) The fluctuation time of the special symbol is shorter than that in the normal state.
As a result, the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening, and the frequency of executing the second special figure game increases. The time saving state is controlled, for example, until a predetermined number of variable displays are executed.

Further, in the determination based on the winning of the second starting winning opening, the small hit probability is, for example, 96/100. Therefore, in the variable display (mainly the second special figure game) in the time saving state, the small hit symbol is easily derived and displayed. In the small hit game state, the special variable winning ball device is opened, and when the game ball passes through a specific area of the special variable winning ball device, the big hit game is executed. In the small hit game in the short time state, since the opening time of the special variable winning ball device is longer than in the normal state, it is easy to win a prize in the special variable winning ball device and to easily pass through the V region. ..

In the time saving state, if the game ball is controlled to the small hit game state and passes through the specific area before the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed, the special state is terminated and the big hit game is executed. In the time saving state, even if the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed before the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed, the special state may be terminated and the jackpot game may be executed. Then, when the jackpot game is executed, the time is controlled again according to the jackpot type. In this way, in the time saving state, the player can expect many prize balls by executing the big hit game a plurality of times (by the consecutive villas) with the small hit game intervening.

Here, the first special symbol may be variably displayed even in the time saving state. For example, in the case of the first hit, variable display may be performed based on the first hold memory stored before the big hit game is performed, and although the game is performed by right-handed in a short time state, it happens to be the first. 1 You may win a prize in the starting prize opening. Then, the variable display of the first special symbol in the time saving state may be a variation in which the display result indicating the big hit is derived and displayed. In addition, the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol may have a long fluctuation time (for example, 2 minutes) to some extent. On the other hand, in the time saving state, the second special symbol is shortened and fluctuated, and the display result of the small hit is easily derived and displayed. When the display result indicating the small hit (or big hit) is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol is interrupted.

Here, the game control microcomputer of the one-type and two-type mixed type pachinko game machine displays the first special symbol in a variable manner when the display result indicating that the second special symbol indicates a small hit (or a large hit) is derived and displayed. (2 minute fluctuation) is interrupted, the variable display of the first special symbol is restarted after the interruption, and the remaining fluctuation time designation command is output to the effect control CPU. Then, the effect control CPU executes the effect corresponding to the residual variation time based on the residual variation time designation command.

Specifically, when the jackpot (2 minute fluctuation) is executed as the variable display of the first special symbol in the time saving state, the effect control CPU uses the remaining time suggestion mode different from the normal time saving mode to perform the second. It is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the variable display of a special symbol.

In this way, the feature unit 013SH can be applied to a pachinko machine of a mixed type of one type and two types. Therefore, in the time saving state, it is possible to control to one of a plurality of types of effect modes, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

(Modification Example 8 of Feature 013SH)
Next, a modification 8 of the feature portion 013SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature unit 013SH, a configuration in which the feature unit 013SH is applied to the so-called small hit RUSH type pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described. Instead of such a configuration, it is also possible to apply the feature unit 013SH to a so-called ordinary probabilistic type pachinko gaming machine. An example of one specification of a normal probabilistic type pachinko gaming machine will be described below.

A normal probability variation type pachinko gaming machine includes, for example, a first start winning opening that can be won by left-handed, a gate that can be won by right-handed, and a second starting winning opening that can be won by right-handed. A normal probability variation type pachinko machine is controlled to one of a low probability / low base state, a low probability / high base state, and a high probability / high base state. The jackpot probability in the low probability state is, for example, 1/300. The jackpot probability in the high probability state is, for example, 1/30. Note that each jackpot probability can be set to a different value depending on the set value.

Further, in a normal probabilistic type pachinko gaming machine, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be changed at the same time. In the high base state, the game (mainly the second special figure game) is advanced by right-handed aiming at the gate arranged on the right side of the game area and the second start winning opening.

Here, even in the high base state, the first special symbol may be variably displayed. For example, in the case of the first hit, variable display may be performed based on the first hold memory stored before the big hit game is performed, and although the right-handed game was performed in the high base state, it happened to be performed. You may win a prize in the first start winning opening. Then, the variable display of the first special symbol in the high base state may be a variation in which the display result indicating the big hit is derived and displayed.

In addition, the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol may have a long fluctuation time (for example, 2 minutes) to some extent. On the other hand, in the high base state, the second special symbol is shortened and fluctuated, and the display result of the big hit is easily derived and displayed. When the display result indicating the jackpot is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is interrupted.

Here, the game control microcomputer of a normal probability variation type pachinko game machine displays a variable display (two-minute variation) of the first special symbol when a display result indicating that the second special symbol is a big hit is derived and displayed. It is interrupted, and after the interruption, the variable display of the first special symbol is restarted, and the remaining fluctuation time designation command is output to the effect control CPU. Then, the effect control CPU executes the effect corresponding to the residual variation time based on the residual variation time designation command.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 has a mode indicating a high base state (for example, a time saving mode or a probability change) when a jackpot fluctuation (two-minute fluctuation) is executed as a variable display of the first special symbol in the high base state. By the remaining time suggestion mode different from the mode), it is possible to execute the effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol.

In this way, the feature unit 013SH can be applied to a normal probability variation type pachinko gaming machine. Therefore, in the high base state, it is possible to control one of a plurality of types of effect modes, so that the interest of the game can be improved.
..

(Explanation of Means Related to Feature 013SH)
Regarding the above-mentioned feature unit 013SH, for example, some pachinko gaming machines control the pachinko gaming machine to a special state in which the small hit gaming state is more frequently controlled than the normal state. In such a pachinko gaming machine, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed at the same time. For example, there is known a gaming machine capable of executing the variable display of the second special symbol controlled to the small hit game state a plurality of times during the variable display of the first special symbol (for example, JP-A-2019-042138). .)

However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-042138, the production is performed in one type of production mode in a special state, so that the interest is insufficient.

Therefore, the gaming machine of the means 1 according to the feature unit 013SH is
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of playing a game).
A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that controls a game state, and
Variable display execution means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 and an effect control CPU 120) that variablely displays identification information (for example, a special symbol or a decorative symbol) and derives and displays a display result.
An effect control means capable of controlling an effect (for example, an effect control CPU 120) and
With
The variable display executing means can execute the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) in parallel.
The game state control means includes a plurality of types of advantageous states having different advantages for the player (for example, a big hit game state), a special state different from the plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, a small hit game state), and the above. It is possible to control the special state (for example, the KT state) in which the game value is easily given by the special state based on the variable display of the second identification information.
The plurality of types of advantageous states include a first advantageous state (for example, 10R probability variation jackpot B) and a second advantageous state (for example, 10R normal jackpot) whose advantage is lower than that of the first advantageous state. ,
The effect control means
In the special state, the predetermined effect mode (for example, the small hit RUSH mode A in FIG. 10-21 (C) and the small hit RUSH mode B in FIG. 10-22 (C)) corresponds to the variable display of the second identification information. (For example, small hit notification effect, decorative pattern variation effect, background image display, etc.) can be executed.
As the variable display of the first identification information in the special state, a special variable display corresponding to the control of the first advantageous state (for example, the variable display of the first fluctuation pattern # 60 in FIG. 10-7 (C)) is executed. A special effect mode different from the predetermined effect mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-19 (F), a remaining time suggestion mode in which the display area of the background image 013SH150B decreases with the passage of time). Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, when the special variable display is executed in the special state, the effect corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information can be executed by the special effect mode, while the special variable display is executed in the special state. If not, the effect corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information can be executed by the predetermined effect mode. Therefore, in the special state, the effect can be performed in any of the plurality of effect modes, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, as the game machine of the means 2 according to the feature unit 013SH, in the game machine described in the means 1.
The effect control means can execute variable display of decorative identification information (for example, decorative symbol 013SH100 in FIG. 10-19 (D)) in response to variable display of the identification information.
The variation mode of the variable display of the decoration identification information differs between the predetermined effect mode and the special effect mode (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 (C) and 10-19 (D), the small hit RUSH mode A has a decorative pattern. 013SH100A is displayed, and the decorative symbol 013SH100B is displayed in the remaining time suggestion mode as shown in FIGS. 10-20 (G) and (H).

According to such a configuration, the variation mode of the variable display of the decoration identification information can be changed for each effect mode, so that the effect effect of each effect mode can be improved.

Further, as the game machine of the means 3 according to the feature unit 013SH, in the game machine according to the means 1 or 2.
The effect control means
Corresponding to the variable display of the identification information, the variable display of the reduced decoration identification information (for example, the first small symbol 013SH101 and the second small symbol 013SH102 of FIG. 10-19 (C)) can be executed.
The number of information related to the variable display can be displayed as the number of holds (for example, the first hold number display 013SH131 and the second hold number display 013SH132 in FIG. 10-19 (C)).
The variable display of the reduced decoration identification information and the holding number display are displayed in a common display area regardless of the predetermined effect mode and the special effect mode, respectively (for example, FIGS. 10-19 (C)). , FIG. 10-19 (F), the first small symbol 013SH101, the second small symbol 013SH102, the first reserved number display 013SH131, and the second reserved number display 015SH132 are displayed in a common display area).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the variable display of the reduced decoration identification information and the display of the number of pending numbers from changing depending on the effect mode. Therefore, the player can easily grasp the variable display and the hold number display of the reduced decoration identification information in each effect mode.

Further, as the game machine of the means 4 according to the feature unit 013SH, in the game machine according to any one of the means 1 to 3.
The predetermined effect mode includes a first predetermined effect mode (for example, the small hit RUSH mode A in FIG. 10-21 (A)) and a second predetermined effect mode different from the first predetermined effect mode (for example, FIG. 10-). 22 (A) small hit RUSH mode B), including
The first predetermined effect mode and the second predetermined effect mode can be switched according to the operation of the player (for example, the player can select as shown in FIG. 10-19 (B)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform the production in the production mode according to the preference of the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as the game machine of the means 5 according to the feature unit 013SH, in the game machine according to any one of the means 1 to 4.
The effect control means has a first corresponding display corresponding to the given game value (for example, a total prize ball number display 013SH120 in FIG. 10-19 (C)) and a second corresponding display corresponding to the number of executions of the special state. The display (for example, the cumulative display indicating the cumulative number of times the small hit game has been executed) and the display can be displayed.
The first corresponding display and the second corresponding display are displayed in a common display mode regardless of the predetermined effect mode and the special effect mode, respectively (for example, the total of FIGS. 10-19 (C)). The prize ball number display 013SH120 and the total prize ball number display 013SH120 in FIG. 10-19 (F) are common display modes).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the first corresponding display and the second corresponding display from changing depending on the effect mode. Therefore, the player can easily grasp the first correspondence display and the second correspondence display in each effect mode.

Further, as the game machine of the means 6 according to the feature unit 013SH, in the game machine according to any one of the means 1 to 5.
As the variable display of the first identification information in the special state, the effect control means has a predetermined variable display corresponding to the control of the second advantageous state (for example, the first variation pattern # 60 in FIG. 10-7 (C)). However, when a variation pattern different from this is executed, the effect corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (for example, FIG. 10-21 (for example, FIG. 10-21)) is performed by the predetermined effect mode. C), the effect shown in FIG. 10-22 (C)) can be executed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the variable display of the fluctuation time different between the predetermined variable display and the special variable display. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect in the effect mode according to the fluctuation time of each variable display. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, as the game machine of the means 7 according to the feature unit 013SH, in the game machine according to any one of the means 1 to 6.
The effect control means can execute a transition effect (for example, the transition effect of FIG. 10-19 (E)) to shift to the special effect mode when starting the effect in the special effect mode.

According to such a configuration, the start of the special effect mode can be emphasized, so that the player can be more uplifted. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as the game machine of the means 8 according to the feature unit 013SH, in the game machine according to any one of the means 1 to 7.
The gaming state control means is a specific state (for example, high probability / high base state: probabilistic state) that is likely to be controlled to any one of the plurality of types of advantageous states after being controlled to the first advantageous state. Is controllable and
By executing the effect in the special effect mode, the game value in the special state (for example, the number of prize balls of 1200 balls in the KT state shown in FIG. 10-3) is derived and displayed in the special variable display. The game value according to the controlled first advantageous state (for example, the number of prize balls of 1200 balls in the 10R probability variation jackpot shown in FIG. 10-3) and the game value due to any of the advantageous states in the specific state (for example, It is confirmed that the number of prize balls of 1200 balls), which is shown in FIG. 10-3, is given even in the case of the 10R normal jackpot with the lowest profit degree.

With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest an approximate number of prize balls by starting the special effect mode. Therefore, the player can be more uplifted by starting the special effect mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as the game machine of the means 9 according to the feature unit 013SH, in the game machine according to any one of the means 1 to 8.
The plurality of types of advantageous states include a first advantageous state and a third advantageous state (for example, a 2R probability variation jackpot) whose degree of advantage is different from that of the second advantageous state.
The effect control means does not perform the effect in the special effect mode when the variable display corresponding to the control of the third advantageous state is executed as the variable display of the first identification information in the special state (KT). In the jackpot variation of the first special symbol in which the display result of the 2R probability variation jackpot is derived and displayed in the state, the small hit RUSH mode A is continued as shown in FIG. 10-21 (B), or FIG. 10-22 ( As shown in B), the small hit RUSH mode B is continued).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform an effect in the special effect mode according to the type of advantageous state. Therefore, by starting the special effect mode, it is possible to suggest the type of advantageous state to be controlled thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as the game machine of the means 10 according to the feature unit 013SH, in the game machine according to any one of the means 1 to 9.
The effect control means
It is possible to output a predetermined song,
The first corresponding effect corresponding to the control of the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-19 (D), the character image 013SH120A is displayed in the small hit RUSH mode A) and the game medium are variablely won in the special state. The second corresponding effect corresponding to winning the means (as shown in FIG. 10-19 (D), the winning effect image 013SH121A in the small hit RUSH mode A) can be executed.
The predetermined music is output regardless of the predetermined production mode and the special production mode (a common music is output in the remaining time suggestion mode and the small hit RUSH modes A and B).
The first corresponding effect and the second corresponding effect are executed in different effect modes in the predetermined effect mode and the special effect mode, respectively (as shown in FIG. 10-20 (H), the remaining time is suggested. In the mode, the character image 013SH120B and the winning effect image 013SH121B are displayed).

According to such a configuration, it can be suggested that the special state (KT state) is continued depending on the music by outputting the common music regardless of the production mode. Further, by making the first corresponding effect and the second corresponding effect different depending on the effect mode, the effect of each effect can be improved.

Further, as the game machine of the means 11 according to the feature unit 013SH, in the game machine according to the means 10.
A setting means (for example,) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values including a first setting value (for example, "1") and a second setting value (for example, "6") having different advantages for the player. Further equipped with a game control microcomputer 100)
The effect control means can suggest a set value set in the setting means by at least one of the first corresponding effect and the second corresponding effect (FIG. 10-22 (Fig. 10-22). The set value may be suggested by the display mode of the enemy character 013SH161 shown in D) or the winning effect image 015SH121C).

According to such a configuration, since the set value can be suggested, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special state and the special state.

Further, as the game machine of the means 12 according to the feature unit 013SH, in the game machine according to any one of the means 1 to 11.
The effect control means
Corresponding to the control of the first advantageous state in the predetermined effect mode, the predetermined advantageous effect (for example, the promotion jackpot effect of FIGS. 10-21 (F) and 10-22 (F)) can be executed.
Corresponding to the control of the first advantageous state in the special effect mode, a special advantageous effect different from the predetermined advantageous effect (for example, the special jackpot effect shown in FIG. 10-20 (L)) can be executed.

According to such a configuration, since it is possible to perform an advantageous effect corresponding to each effect mode, it is possible to obtain a series of effects by the effect mode and the advantageous effect. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature Unit 014SH)
With respect to the feature portion 014SH related to the feature portion 013SH described above, for example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed at the same time. For example, there is known a gaming machine that interrupts the variable display of the first special symbol when a display result indicating a small hit is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-033787). Gazette).

However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-033787, when a predetermined condition is satisfied with one of the identification information, when the variable display of the other identification information is interrupted, an effect corresponding to the interruption is produced. I couldn't do it, and the interest was insufficient.

Therefore, the gaming machine of the means 1 according to the feature unit 014SH is
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of playing a game).
Variable display execution means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 and an effect control CPU 120) that variablely displays identification information (for example, a special symbol or a decorative symbol) and derives and displays a display result.
An effect control means capable of controlling an effect (for example, an effect control CPU 120) and
An information output means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) for outputting information to the effect control means is provided.
The variable display execution means
The variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel.
When a predetermined condition corresponding to one variable display (for example, the second special symbol) is satisfied (for example, the big hit symbol is stopped or the small hit symbol is stopped), the other variable display (for example, the first special symbol) is performed. (As shown in FIGS. 10-12 and 10-13, the update of the timer of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game or the big hit game based on the variable display of the second special symbol. After the interruption, the other variable display is restarted.
The information output means can output special information (residual fluctuation time designation command) capable of specifying the remaining variable display time of the other variable display to the effect control means (as shown in 013SHS1309A of FIG. 10-13). , Send the residual fluctuation time specification command A.),
The effect control means displays the background image 013SH150B in the remaining time suggestion mode as shown in the effect corresponding to the variable display time specified based on the special information (for example, FIGS. 10-20 (G) and 10-20 (H)). The effect that the area decreases with the passage of time) is feasible,
A game machine characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, since the remaining variable display time of the variable display of the other identification information can be grasped, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the remaining variable display time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as the game machine of the means 2 according to the feature unit 014SH, in the game machine described in the means 1.
The information output means can output the special information at a timing when the remaining variable display time of the other variable display reaches a predetermined time (for example, as shown in 013SHS1313A of FIG. 10-13, the remaining 1 second. The remaining fluctuation time specification command B1 is transmitted at the timing.)

According to such a configuration, when the variable display of the other identification information reaches a predetermined time, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the timing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as the game machine of the means 3 according to the feature unit 014SH, in the game machine according to the means 1 or 2.
The information output means can output the special information every time the variable display time of the other variable display elapses (as shown in 013SHS1309A of FIG. 10-13, the residual variation is made at 10-second intervals. The time specification command A is sent.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the timing of the variable display of the other identification information at each timing when the special time elapses. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as the game machine of the means 4 according to the feature unit 014SH, in the game machine according to any one of the means 1 to 3.
The effect control means is a notification effect that suggests the remaining variable display time based on the special information (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-20 (G) and 10-20 (H), the background image 013SH150B in the remaining time suggestion mode. The display area of is reduced with the passage of time).

With such a configuration, the remaining variable display time can be suggested. As a result, the player can play the game according to the remaining variable display time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as the game machine of the means 5 according to the feature unit 014SH, in the game machine according to any one of the means 1 to 4.
A game state control means that can control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) and a special state (for example, a KT state) in which a game value is easily given by the special state based on the variable display of the second identification information. (For example, a game control microcomputer 100) is further provided.
The effect control means
In the special state, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information by any one of a plurality of effect modes (for example, small hit RUSH mode A or remaining time suggestion mode).
It is possible to display the first corresponding display corresponding to the given game value (for example, the total prize ball number display 013SH120 in FIG. 10-19 (C)) and the second corresponding display corresponding to the number of executions of the special state. Yes,
The first correspondence display and the second correspondence display are displayed in a common display mode regardless of the effect mode (for example, the total prize ball number display 013SH120 in FIG. 10-19 (C) and FIG. It is a display mode common to the total prize ball number display 013SH120 of 10-19 (F)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the first corresponding display and the second corresponding display from changing depending on the effect mode. Therefore, the player can easily grasp the first correspondence display and the second correspondence display in each effect mode.

Further, as the game machine of the means 6 according to the feature unit 014SH, in the game machine according to any one of the means 1 to 5.
A plurality of types of advantageous states having different advantages for the player (for example, a big hit game state), a special state different from the plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, a small hit game state), and a variable display of the second identification information. A special state (for example, a KT state) in which a game value is easily given by the special state based on the above, and a game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled are further provided.
The plurality of types of advantageous states include a first advantageous state (for example, 10R probability variation jackpot B) and a second advantageous state (for example, 10R normal jackpot) whose advantage is lower than that of the first advantageous state. ,
As the variable display of the first identification information in the special state, the effect control means has a predetermined variable display corresponding to the control of the second advantageous state (for example, the first variation pattern # 60 in FIG. 10-7 (C)). However, when a variation pattern different from this is executed, a predetermined effect mode (for example, small hit RUSH mode A in FIG. 10-21 (C), FIG. 10-22 (C)) is executed. ) By the small hit RUSH mode B), it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 10-21 (C) and 10-22 (C)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform an effect in an effect mode according to a predetermined variable display. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, as the game machine of the means 7 according to the feature unit 014SH, in the game machine according to any one of the means 1 to 6.
The information output means
The special information can be output (for example, when the special variable display (for example, the variable display of the first variation pattern # 60 of FIG. 10-7 (C)) is executed as the variable display of the first identification information (for example). , As shown in FIGS. 10-12 and 10-13, in the variable display of the first special symbol, the timing of each 10 seconds in the special variable display (6 minutes) and the special variable display (6 minutes) The timing of the last 1 second in is specified, and the command is sent at the specified timing.),
When other variable display other than the special variable display is executed as the variable display of the identification information, the special information is not output (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-15, the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. Then, the timing of every 10 seconds in the special variable display (6 minutes) and the timing of the last 1 second in the special variable display (6 minutes) are not specified, and commands are used at these timings. Also does not send.).

According to such a configuration, in the special variable display of the first identification information, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the variable display time specified based on the special information. As a result, it is possible to perform an effective effect in the special variable display of the first identification information. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Frame LED
10… General winning opening 11… Main board 12… Production control board 13… Voice control board 14… LED control board 15… Relay board 17… Special variable winning ball device 20… Ordinary symbol display 21… Gate switch 22A, 22B… Start Mouth switch 23 ... 1st count switch 24 ... 2nd count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 41 ... Passing gate 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123… Display control unit

Claims (1)

It is a game machine that can play games
A variable display execution means that performs variable display of identification information and derives and displays the display result,
A production control means that can control the production,
An information output means for outputting information to the effect control means and
With
The variable display execution means
The variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel.
When a predetermined condition corresponding to one variable display is satisfied, the other variable display is interrupted, and after the interruption, the other variable display is restarted.
The information output means can output special information capable of specifying the remaining variable display time of the other variable display to the effect control means.
The effect control means can execute an effect corresponding to a variable display time specified based on the special information.
A game machine characterized by that.

Images